Siemens SINUMERIK 828D Commissioning Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Siemens Manuals
  4. Controller
  5. SINUMERIK 828D Turning
  6. Commissioning manual

Siemens SINUMERIK 828D Commissioning Manual

Hide thumbs Also See for SINUMERIK 828D:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

See also: Diagnostic Manual , Service Manual
Commissioning
SINUMERIK
SINUMERIK 828D
Commissioning
Commissioning Manual
Valid for:
CNC software Version 4.7 SP2
10/2015
6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3
___________________
Preface
Fundamental safety
___________________
instructions
___________________
CNC commissioning
___________________
SINUMERIK Operate
___________________
Easy XML
___________________
SINUMERIK Integrate
Access MyMachine / OPC UA
___________________
SINUMERIK Integrate
Run MyScreens
___________________
Appendix
1
2
3
4
5
6
A

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the SINUMERIK 828D and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Related Manuals for Siemens SINUMERIK 828D

Summary of Contents for Siemens SINUMERIK 828D

  • Page 1 ___________________ Commissioning Preface Fundamental safety ___________________ instructions ___________________ SINUMERIK CNC commissioning ___________________ SINUMERIK Operate SINUMERIK 828D Commissioning ___________________ Easy XML ___________________ SINUMERIK Integrate Access MyMachine / OPC UA Commissioning Manual ___________________ SINUMERIK Integrate Run MyScreens ___________________ Appendix Valid for: CNC software Version 4.7 SP2...
  • Page 2 Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems.

  • Page 3: Preface

    Siemens content: MDM (www.siemens.com/mdm) Training You can find information about the range of training courses under: ● SITRAIN (www.siemens.com/sitrain) - training courses from Siemens for automation products, systems and solutions ● SinuTrain (www.siemens.com/sinutrain) - training software for SINUMERIK FAQs You can find Frequently Asked Questions in the Service&Support pages under Product...
  • Page 4 Technical support Country-specific telephone numbers for technical support are provided in the Internet under "Contact" (www.siemens.com/automation/service&support). EC Declaration of Conformity The EC declaration of conformity for the EMC directive can be found in the Internet under: (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/10805517/134200)

  • Page 5: Table Of Contents

    Residual risks of power drive systems ..................11 CNC commissioning..........................15 SINUMERIK Operate .......................... 369 Easy XML ............................753 SINUMERIK Integrate Access MyMachine / OPC UA ................893 SINUMERIK Integrate Run MyScreens ....................931 Appendix............................1167 Documentation overview SINUMERIK 828D ..............1167 Commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 6 Table of contents Commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 7: Fundamental Safety Instructions

    Fundamental safety instructions General safety instructions DANGER Danger to life due to live parts and other energy sources Death or serious injury can result when live parts are touched. • Only work on electrical devices when you are qualified for this job. •...
  • Page 8 Fundamental safety instructions 1.1 General safety instructions WARNING Danger to life when live parts are touched on damaged devices Improper handling of devices can cause damage. For damaged devices, hazardous voltages can be present at the enclosure or at exposed components;...
  • Page 9 Fundamental safety instructions 1.1 General safety instructions WARNING Danger to life through unexpected movement of machines when using mobile wireless devices or mobile phones Using mobile wireless devices or mobile phones with a transmit power > 1 W closer than approx.

  • Page 10: Handling Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (Esd)

    Fundamental safety instructions 1.2 Handling electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD) WARNING Danger to life or malfunctions of the machine as a result of incorrect or changed parameterization As a result of incorrect or changed parameterization, machines can malfunction, which in turn can lead to injuries or death. •...

  • Page 11: Industrial Security

    Siemens recommends strongly that you regularly check for product updates. For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept.
  • Page 12 Fundamental safety instructions 1.4 Residual risks of power drive systems These components may only be handled by qualified and trained technical personnel who are knowledgeable and observe all of the safety instructions on the components and in the associated technical user documentation. When assessing the machine's risk in accordance with the respective local regulations (e.g., EC Machinery Directive), the machine manufacturer must take into account the following residual risks emanating from the control and drive components of a drive system:...
  • Page 13 Fundamental safety instructions 1.4 Residual risks of power drive systems 4. Electrical, magnetic and electromagnetic fields generated in operation that can pose a risk to people with a pacemaker, implants or metal replacement joints, etc., if they are too close 5.
  • Page 14 Fundamental safety instructions 1.4 Residual risks of power drive systems Commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 15: Cnc Commissioning

    Scope of delivery and requirements Introduction and use of data classes SINUMERIK Operating software settings Parameterizing machine data SINUMERIK 828D CNC commissioning Commissioning the drive Tuning Commissioning Manual Service Planner Easy Extend Tool management Easy Archive Appendix Valid for: CNC software Version 4.7 SP2...
  • Page 16 Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems.
  • Page 17 Table of contents Scope of delivery and requirements......................9 System overview........................9 Commissioning and service tools...................11 Commissioning process......................13 1.3.1 Guide to the documentation....................13 Starting up the control......................16 To select the cylindrical/surface grinding technology, proceed as follows:......20 Communication with the control.....................23 1.6.1 Communicating with the control via X130................23 1.6.2 How to communicate with the control using the Programming Tool........25 1.6.3...
  • Page 18 Table of contents 3.7.3 Description of the syntax for the online help................63 3.7.4 Example: This is how you generate an OEM-specific online help book.........66 3.7.5 Example: How to create an online help for user PLC alarms..........69 3.7.6 Example: This is how you generate an online help for NC/PLC variables......71 3.7.7 Example: This is how you generate a programming online help..........74 Parameterizing machine data........................77...
  • Page 19 Table of contents 5.6.1 Data sets - overview......................155 5.6.2 Adding a data set.........................156 5.6.3 Remove data set........................162 5.6.4 Modify data set........................165 Tuning...............................167 Control response........................167 Automatic servo optimization....................170 6.2.1 Options before the start......................170 6.2.2 Selecting the tuning strategy....................171 6.2.3 How to start the automatic servo optimization..............176 6.2.4 This is how you start path interpolation................179 Optimizing the axis jerk......................183...
  • Page 20 Table of contents Generating language-dependent text...................244 Examples..........................246 8.6.1 Example with parameters to support the commissioning.............246 8.6.2 Example with control elements....................248 8.6.3 Example of a power unit.......................249 Tool management.............................251 Fundamentals........................251 9.1.1 Tool Management - Overview....................251 9.1.2 Structure of the tool management..................252 9.1.3 Components of the tool management..................254 9.1.4...
  • Page 21 Table of contents 10.2 Which data is backed up in the archive?................334 10.3 This is how you back up just the machine data that have changed........337 10.4 This is how you create a commissioning archive..............338 10.5 This is how you import a commissioning archive..............340 10.6 Example: Data archiving "Easy Archive"...
  • Page 22 Table of contents CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 23: Scope Of Delivery And Requirements

    Scope of delivery and requirements System overview Configuration with SINAMICS S120 Booksize The following configuration shows a typical example with SINAMICS S120 booksize: 1FK7 feed motor 1PH8 spindle motor 1FK7 feed motor 1FK7 feed motor Figure 1-1 Configuration example 1: Basic configuration with 4 axes CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 24 3 AC 380 ... 480 V 1PH8 spindle 1FK7 feed motor 1FK7 feed motor 1FK7 feed motor 1FK7 feed motor motor 1PH8 auxiliary spindle Figure 1-2 Configuration example 2: SINUMERIK 828D BASIC with S120 Combi CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 25: Commissioning And Service Tools

    Scope of delivery and requirements 1.2 Commissioning and service tools Commissioning and service tools Toolbox CD The Toolbox CD for SINUMERIK 828D has the following content: ● Configuration data ● PLC Programming Tool ● Access MyMachine /P2P ● Program for cycle protection ●...
  • Page 26 Scope of delivery and requirements 1.2 Commissioning and service tools STARTER drive/commissioning software Drive commissioning for the SINUMERIK 828D can be performed using the STARTER drive/ commissioning software. ● Simple commissioning procedures which are usually performed by field service staff (such as activating direct measuring systems) are executed directly via the SINUMERIK 828D user interface.

  • Page 27: Commissioning Process

    Scope of delivery and requirements 1.3 Commissioning process Commissioning process 1.3.1 Guide to the documentation Sequence The commissioning process described in the following table represents an efficient suggestion that is also discussed in the SINUMERIK training. The tasks shown in square brackets apply to the numbers of the steps described in the training documents.
  • Page 28 Scope of delivery and requirements 1.3 Commissioning process <B026> Creating a PLC program "PLC programming tool" online help <B019> S7-200 PLC instructions "PLC programming tool" online help <B033> PLC functions "Fundamentals" Function Manual (P4) <B031> PLC alarms and messages → function interface: PLC "Fundamentals"...
  • Page 29 Scope of delivery and requirements 1.3 Commissioning process Supplementary conditions This manual assumes the following general conditions: ● The mechanical and electrical installation of the system must have been completed. ● Check the system visually for: – Correct mechanical installation with secure electrical connections –...

  • Page 30: Starting Up The Control

    Scope of delivery and requirements 1.4 Starting up the control Starting up the control Control startup Procedure: 1. Switch the control on. The following display then appears during startup: 2. Press the <SELECT> key within three seconds. CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 31 Scope of delivery and requirements 1.4 Starting up the control 3. To call the "Startup menu", press the following keys in succession: Menu back key, HSK2 (horizontal softkey 2), VSK2 (vertical softkey 2) Note PPU with touch operation To call the Startup menu during startup, there is an additional shortcut for all PPUs: "8" → "2"...
  • Page 32 A backup of the system CompactFlash card is saved to the user CompactFlash card or USB FlashDrive. NCK default data The system loads the Siemens NCK data default settings and de‐ letes the retentive data on the PLC. Drive default data The SINAMICS user data is deleted.
  • Page 33 Replacement of the system CompactFlash card between different PPUs Because of the system-related dependency between the CompactFlash card and SRAM for the data storage in the SINUMERIK 828D, the system CompactFlash card should be considered as a permanently installed EEPROM and should not be replaced! If this has to be performed for imperative reasons, the replacement of the system CompactFlash card is detected during startup because of the stored serial number.

  • Page 34: To Select The Cylindrical/Surface Grinding Technology, Proceed As Follows

    Scope of delivery and requirements 1.5 To select the cylindrical/surface grinding technology, proceed as follows: To select the cylindrical/surface grinding technology, proceed as follows: Selecting the grinding technology During the control startup, the startup menu provides the option to change the technology from cylindrical grinding to surface grinding or vice versa.
  • Page 35 Scope of delivery and requirements 1.5 To select the cylindrical/surface grinding technology, proceed as follows: 4. Use the cursor keys to select the "Change Grinding type" menu command. A description is output in the footer for this action. CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 36 Scope of delivery and requirements 1.5 To select the cylindrical/surface grinding technology, proceed as follows: 5. Press the <INPUT> key to confirm the selection. 6. The following confirmation prompt is output before the switchover: The control has been switched over to the new grinding type. Note Licenses The existing licenses are reset when changing the grinding type from surface grinding to...

  • Page 37: Communication With The Control

    Scope of delivery and requirements 1.6 Communication with the control Communication with the control Creating the connection An Ethernet cable is needed to connect the control and PG/PC. The following Ethernet interfaces are available on the control: ● Connection via X127 (behind the flap on the front): Cable type: Crossed Ethernet cable At interface X127, the control is preset as a DHCP server, delivering the IP address192.168.215.1 for a direct connection (peer-to-peer connection).
  • Page 38 Scope of delivery and requirements 1.6 Communication with the control Figure 1-3 Network settings Company network X130 white Network cable inserted Network cable not inserted Availability The availability describes the percentage of faulty data compared to the entire data volume. Problems in the company network (e.g.

  • Page 39: How To Communicate With The Control Using The Programming Tool

    Scope of delivery and requirements 1.6 Communication with the control 1.6.2 How to communicate with the control using the Programming Tool Setting up the communications interface in the PLC Programming Tool Procedure: 1. Start the PLC Programming Tool via the following link or via the "Start" menu: 2.

  • Page 40: How To Communicate With The Control Via Access Mymachine

    Scope of delivery and requirements 1.6 Communication with the control 7. Connect by double-clicking the "Double-click to update" icon. If the connection is made successfully, the icon will be displayed with a green border: Figure 1-5 Online connection If a connection is not established, check the settings under "Network connections" → "Local Area Connection".
  • Page 41 Scope of delivery and requirements 1.6 Communication with the control Note Generally only one connection is permitted, i.e. several simultaneous connections to different controls are not supported: Data exchange between two controls by means of "Access MyMachine" is therefore not possible. Direct connection To create a direct connection: 1.
  • Page 42 Scope of delivery and requirements 1.6 Communication with the control Network connection To create a network connection: 1. In the menu, select "Settings" → "Connection" → "Direct connection" or click the "Connect" button. Figure 1-8 Dialog: Network connection 2. In the menu, select "Connection" → "Connect" → "Network connection" or select – if available –...

  • Page 43: Introduction And Use Of Data Classes

    Introduction and use of data classes Objective The principle of data classes creates a clear demarcation between system data, (data that is created when installing the software), OEM data (data that is created when commissioning a prototype machine) and user data (data that is created by the user). OEM data is further classified into data that is valid for a series of machines (standard data for all machines of a series) and individual data, which only applies to a specific machine.

  • Page 44: Data Classes In The Nc

    M (Manufacturer), I (Individual), U (User) and S (System) System (S) data class This data class covers data in the Siemens and System directories on the CompactFlash Card. For the rest of this document it will be referred to as "S".
  • Page 45 Introduction and use of data classes 2.1 Data classes in the NC Individual (I) data class This data class covers data concerning a particular machine and is also created during commissioning by the OEM, or later by the dealer. This data class will be referred to as "I" in the rest of this document.
  • Page 46 Introduction and use of data classes 2.1 Data classes in the NC Data class attribute The data class attribute is set implicitly. The default setting of the data class attribute can be explicitly changed. ● In general, data from the active file system is assigned to a data class as it belongs to a certain file.

  • Page 47: Data Classes In The Plc

    Introduction and use of data classes 2.2 Data classes in the PLC Data classes in the PLC Data classes in the PLC Assigning program blocks in data classes is used to efficiently upgrade or commission a SINUMERIK control. Here, a distinction is made between three data classes: ●...

  • Page 48: Data Classes In The Operating Software

    USER The directories "System" and "Siemens" have no significance for archiving, since they are set up with the installation of the SINUMERIK software and are not changed by installation, configuration or in later use. An update or upgrade of the system will typically be carried out in these directories.
  • Page 49 Introduction and use of data classes 2.3 Data classes in the operating software siemens directory /ico640 Icons with a resolution 640x480 /ico800 Icons with a resolution 800x600 /ico1024 Icons with a resolution 1024x768 /ico1280 Icons with a resolution 1280x1024 /ico1600...
  • Page 50 Introduction and use of data classes 2.3 Data classes in the operating software oem directory /data Version data /hlp Online help files /hlps Online help files, zipped and version files /ico Icon files /ico640 Icons with a resolution 640x480 /ico800 Icons with a resolution 800x600 /ico1024 Icons with a resolution 1024x768...

  • Page 51: Operating Software Settings

    Operating software settings Access levels Access to functions and machine data The access concept controls access to functions and data areas. Access levels 0 to 7 are available, where 0 represents the highest level and 7 the lowest level. Access levels 0 to 3 are locked using a password and 4 to 7 using the appropriate key-operated switch.
  • Page 52 The key-operated switch setting must always be edited from the PLC user program and applied to the interface accordingly. References The password can also be deleted via the → PI service: LOGOUT Function Manual Basic Functions, Section "PLC for SINUMERIK 828D" (P4) CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 53: How To Set And Change The Password

    Operating software settings 3.2 How to set and change the password How to set and change the password Set password To change the access level, select the "Start-up" operating area: 1. Press the "Password" softkey. 2. Press the "Set password" softkey to open the following dialog: Figure 3-1 Set password 3.

  • Page 54: How To Set The Date And Time

    Operating software settings 3.3 How to set the date and time How to set the date and time Requirement Changes can only be made with the appropriate access authorization (as of "User" and higher). Setting the date and time Procedure: 1.

  • Page 55: Setting The Operating Software Languages

    ● Portuguese (Brazil) ● Spanish ● Chinese (traditional) All system languages are installed in the SINUMERIK 828D as delivered, so that the language can be changed directly at the user interface, without having to download system language data. Additional languages Additional languages are available on the language extensions DVD.

  • Page 56: Entering Asian Characters Using The Input Method Editor

    Operating software settings 3.4 Setting the operating software languages Deleting a language Procedure: 1. Select the "Startup" operating area and then the "Change language" softkey. 2. The "Language selection" window opens. The active language is highlighted. 3. Select the language that you wish to delete. 4.
  • Page 57 Operating software settings 3.4 Setting the operating software languages Editing the dictionary When this function is activated, another line showing the combined characters and sounds will appear. The editor will then offer various characters for this sound, from which you can choose the desired one by entering the appropriate digit (1 ...

  • Page 58: This Is How You Enter The Chinese Character

    Operating software settings 3.4 Setting the operating software languages Note The dictionaries are also stored in the commissioning archive when "HMI data" is selected (see also: Which data is backed up in the archive? (Page 334)) 3.4.4 This is how you enter the Chinese character Entering Chinese characters A character is selected using a phonetic spelling ("pinyin method"): whose sound can be formed by combining Latin letters.

  • Page 59: This Is How You Enter Korean Characters

    Operating software settings 3.4 Setting the operating software languages Zhuyin input for Chinese traditional For traditional Chinese, the following input options are available: 1. Use the numerical block of the keyboard to form the individual syllables. Each digit is assigned a certain number of letters that can be selected by pressing the numeric key once or several times.
  • Page 60 Operating software settings 3.4 Setting the operating software languages Using the Korean keyboard To enter Korean characters, you will need a keyboard with the keyboard assignment shown below. In terms of key layout, this keyboard is the equivalent of an English QWERTY keyboard and individual characters must be grouped together to form syllables.

  • Page 61: Checking And Entering Licenses

    A license database administered by Siemens is accessed via the Internet for this purpose. Finally, the license information including the license key is transferred to the hardware.
  • Page 62 ● Softkey: "Read in the license key": The license key is read in from the license file. This file is supplied or can be sourced from the Web License Manager (http:// www.siemens.com/automation/license). CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 63: This Is How You Determine Missing Licenses/Options

    Operating software settings 3.5 Checking and entering licenses 3.5.2 This is how you determine missing licenses/options Determining the license requirement Procedure: 1. Press the "All options" softkey to list all the options that can be selected for this control. 2. Activate or deactivate the required options in the "Set" column: –...

  • Page 64: Definitions For License Management

    Operating software settings 3.5 Checking and entering licenses 3.5.3 Definitions for license management Product A product is marked by the data below within the license management of SINUMERIK → software products: ● Product label ● Article number ● → License number Software product The term software product is generally used to describe a product that is installed on a piece of →...
  • Page 65 Operating software settings 3.5 Checking and entering licenses Hardware serial number The hardware serial number is a permanent part of the → CompactFlash card. It is used to identify a control system uniquely. The hardware serial number can be determined by: ●...

  • Page 66: Configuring Plc Alarms

    Operating software settings 3.6 Configuring PLC alarms Configuring PLC alarms 3.6.1 Structure of the PLC alarms Creating and loading the PLC alarms The PLC alarms are configured by the machine manufacturer in the range from 700000 to 700247. An additional 1000 alarms can also be configured in the range from 701000 to 701999. The access level "Manufacturer"...
  • Page 67 Operating software settings 3.6 Configuring PLC alarms ● The NC response when the alarm is triggered is defined in DB4500.DBB3000 to DBB3247 or via MD14516 $MN_USER_DATA_PLC_ALARM. ● For a control with more than one channel, the alarm assignment to the respective channel is defined in DB9913 or via MD14518 $MN_USER_DATA_PLC_ALARM_ASSIGN.

  • Page 68: How To Create Plc Alarms

    ● SINUMERIK 840D sl/828D: Function Manual, Basic Functions: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D (P4), Section "PLC user alarms" ● SINUMERIK 828D Diagnostics Manual, Section "System responses" ● SINUMERIK 828D List Manual NC Variables and Interface Signals 3.6.2 How to create PLC alarms...

  • Page 69: Configuring The Alarm Log

    Operating software settings 3.6 Configuring PLC alarms 3. Place the cursor in the "Direction" field and choose the search direction (forward, backward) with the "SELECT" key. 4. Activate the "Case-sensitive" checkbox when a distinction is to be made between upper and lower case in the entered text.

  • Page 70: How To Configure The Log

    6. Press the "Save log" softkey to save the alarm log. The settings become effective only after restarting the system. Editing the configuration file Procedure: 1. Copy the configuration file "oem_alarmprot_slaesvcconf.xml" from the /siemens/ sinumerik/hmi/template/cfg directory. 2. Insert the file into the directory /oem/sinumerik/hmi/cfg or /user/sinumerik/ hmi/cfg 3.
  • Page 71 Operating software settings 3.6 Configuring PLC alarms The number of events to be output and the type of logging can also be entered directly via the user interface: 1. Press the "Alarm log" → "Settings >" softkey in the "Diagnostics" operating area. As soon as changes are made to the default settings, the "slaesvcconf.xml"...
  • Page 72 Operating software settings 3.6 Configuring PLC alarms <Protocol> <Filters> <Filter_01 type="QString" value= "SEVERITY HIGHER 10 AND SEVERTY LOWER 500" /> </Filters> </Protocol> </CONFIGURATION> CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 73: Creating Oem-Specific Online Help

    SINUMERIK Operate online help system: ● Online help for cycles and/or M functions of the machine manufacturer which extend the programming scope of the SINUMERIK 828D. This online help is called in just the same way as the SINUMERIK Operate online help "Programming".

  • Page 74: Structure And Syntax Of The Configuration File

    Operating software settings 3.7 Creating OEM-specific online help 3.7.1 Structure and syntax of the configuration file Syntax description of the "slhlp.xml" You require the configuration file "slhlp.xml" to integrate the help book in the existing online help system of the user interface: Num‐...

  • Page 75: Structure And Syntax Of The Help Book

    Operating software settings 3.7 Creating OEM-specific online help Num‐ Meaning DefaultLanguage Abbreviation for the language that should be displayed if the actual country language is available for the help book. Attributes: value chs, cht, deu, eng, esp, fra, ita, kor, ptb ... type Data type of the value (QString) The following applies to the "Number"...
  • Page 76 Operating software settings 3.7 Creating OEM-specific online help Number Meaning HMI_SL_HELP Root element of the XML document BOOK Identifies a help book. The name can be freely selected under the constraint that no name predefined by the system is used (such as sinumerik_alarm_plc_pmc).

  • Page 77: Description Of The Syntax For The Online Help

    Operating software settings 3.7 Creating OEM-specific online help 3.7.3 Description of the syntax for the online help Rules for creating the HTML files Generating help files in the HTML format. It is possible to save all information in a single HTML file or to distribute the information over several HTML files.
  • Page 78 Operating software settings 3.7 Creating OEM-specific online help Description Comment Level 6 heading The standard block attributes are supported head Document header Horizontal line Supported attributes: width (can be specified as absolute or relative value) html HTML document Italic Image Supported attributes: src, width, height User-entered text meta...
  • Page 79 Operating software settings 3.7 Creating OEM-specific online help Standard attributes for lists The following attributes are supported by tags ol and ul: ● type (1, a, A, square, disc, circle) Standard attributes for tables The following attributes are supported by tags td and th: ●...

  • Page 80: Example: This Is How You Generate An Oem-Specific Online Help Book

    Operating software settings 3.7 Creating OEM-specific online help Supported CSS selectors All CSS 2.1 selector classes are supported with the exception of so-called pseudo selector classes such as :first-child, :visited and :hover. 3.7.4 Example: This is how you generate an OEM-specific online help book Preconditions Generate the following files: ●...
  • Page 81 Note Updates or changes When displaying the table of contents and index of a help book, for quicker processing, the help files are saved in the binary format in the /siemens/sinumerik/sys_cache/hmi/ hlp directory: slhlp_<Hilfebuch>_*_<lng>.hmi . In the example: slhlp_hmi_myhelp_*_eng.hmi These files must first be deleted so that the changes can take effect and be displayed in the online help.
  • Page 82 Operating software settings 3.7 Creating OEM-specific online help Result The book consists of three chapters with sections: Figure 3-10 Example: OEM online help Entries in the subject index: Figure 3-11 Example: Index CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 83: Example: How To Create An Online Help For User Plc Alarms

    Operating software settings 3.7 Creating OEM-specific online help 3.7.5 Example: How to create an online help for user PLC alarms Overview If a user PLC alarm is triggered, a context-sensitive online help can be created for the respective alarm, e.g. with explanation and remedy. The online help texts for the user PLC alarms are managed in the following file: "sinumerik_alarm_oem_plc_pmc.html"...
  • Page 84 Operating software settings 3.7 Creating OEM-specific online help Creating a help file The file name is language-neutral and must be: sinumerik_alarm_oem_plc_pmc.html <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" standalone="yes"?> <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC> <html> <head><title></title></head> <body> <table> <tr> <td width="15%"> <b><a name="700004">700004</a></b></td> <td width="85%"><b>Help for user PLC alarm 700004 </b></td></tr> <tr><td valign="top"...

  • Page 85: Example: This Is How You Generate An Online Help For Nc/Plc Variables

    1. Copy the file to one of the following directories: /oem/sinumerik/hmi/hlp/<lng>/sinumerik_alarm_plc_pmc/ /user/sinumerik/hmi/hlp/<lng>/sinumerik_alarm_plc_pmc/ <lng> stands for the language code. 2. Delete all files in the directory: /siemens/sinumerik/sys_cache/hmi//hlp The settings become effective only after restarting the system. 3.7.6 Example: This is how you generate an online help for NC/PLC variables Overview...
  • Page 86 Operating software settings 3.7 Creating OEM-specific online help Figure 3-13 Example: Online help for user variables Structure of the online help The following files are required for the online help: File Meaning Configuration file to manage an html file or several html sldgvarviewhelp.ini files The contents of all html files of the online help are lan‐...
  • Page 87 2. Copy the html files to one of the following directories: /oem/sinumerik/hmi/hlp/<lng>/ /user/sinumerik/hmi/hlp/<lng>/ <lng> stands for the language code. 3. Delete all files in the directory: /siemens/sinumerik/sys_cache/hmi//hlp The settings become effective only after restarting the system. CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 88: Example: This Is How You Generate A Programming Online Help

    Operating software settings 3.7 Creating OEM-specific online help 3.7.7 Example: This is how you generate a programming online help Requirements Generate the following files: ● Configuration file "prog_help.ini" [milling] CYCLE1=cycle1_help.html CYCLE2=cycle2_help.html#TextAnchor1 CYCLE3=cycle3_help.html CYCLE4=cycle4_help.html [turning] CYCLE3=cycle2_help.html CYCLE4=cycle3_help.html ● Configuration file for the help book "slhlp.xml" (optional) <?xml version="1.0"...
  • Page 89 Operating software settings 3.7 Creating OEM-specific online help <BOOK ref="index.html" title="OEM_CYCLES" helpdir="hmi_prog_help"> <ENTRY ref="cycle1_help.html" title="Cycle1"></ENTRY> <ENTRY ref="cycle2_help.html" title="Cycle2"></ENTRY> <ENTRY ref="cycle3_help.html" title="Cycle3"></ENTRY> <ENTRY ref="cycle4_help.html" title="Cycle4"></ENTRY> <ENTRY ref="cycle_help.html" title="OEM_Cycles"></ENTRY> </BOOK> </HMI_SL_HELP> ● Language-dependent file "<prog_help_eng>.ts": this filename is permanently specified. <?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8" standalone="yes"?> <!DOCTYPE TS>...
  • Page 90 Operating software settings 3.7 Creating OEM-specific online help 3. Create a directory for the desired language of the online help under the following path: / oem/sinumerik/hmi/hlp/<lng> and copy the hmi_prog_help.xml file there Use the specified language code from the list of language codes for file names. The directory names must be written in lower case.

  • Page 91: Parameterizing Machine Data

    Parameterizing machine data Classification of machine data Authorization for machine data At least the Manufacturer password is necessary to enter or change machine data. WARNING Lethal danger and danger for machines Changes in the machine data have a considerable influence on the machine. Incorrect configuration of the parameters can endanger human life and cause damage to the machine.
  • Page 92 Parameterizing machine data 4.1 Classification of machine data The following properties of the machine data are displayed from left to right: ● Number of the machine data ● Name of the machine data ● Value of the machine data ● Unit of the machine data ●...
  • Page 93 Parameterizing machine data 4.1 Classification of machine data user/sinumerik/hmi/template/user_views The following user views are already available as template: ● Electrical_Startup ● Mechanical_Startup ● Optimizing_Axis See also Description of the data classes: Function Manual Basic Functions (P4) A detailed description of the machine data can be found in the List Manual with references to the appropriate section of the Function Manual.

  • Page 94: Processing Part Programs From External Cnc Systems

    The ISO dialect M or T language types can be selected using MD10880 $MN_EXTERN_CNC_SYSTEM. The two G commands of group 47 are used to switch from Siemens mode to ISO dialect mode: ● G290: Siemens NC programming language active ●...

  • Page 95: Machining Free Form Surfaces Using Advanced Surface

    Parameterizing machine data 4.3 Machining free form surfaces using Advanced Surface Machining free form surfaces using Advanced Surface Machining with Advanced Surface When executing CAM programs in the high-speed cutting (HSC) range, the control has to process high feedrates with the shortest NC blocks. The result should be a good surface quality of the workpiece with high precision in the µm range at extremely high machining feedrates of >...

  • Page 96: Machine Data For Advanced Surface

    Parameterizing machine data 4.4 Machine data for Advanced Surface Machine data for Advanced Surface Machine data for Advanced Surface The following setpoints are recommended for the listed machine data in order to achieve the optimum workpiece surface when machining mold workpieces: General machine data: MD number Designation...
  • Page 97 Parameterizing machine data 4.4 Machine data for Advanced Surface MD number Designation Default set‐ Recom‐ Data Parameter ting mendation class 20603[0] $MC_CURV_EFFECT_ON_PATH_JERK 20603[1] $MC_CURV_EFFECT_ON_PATH_JERK 20603[2] $MC_CURV_EFFECT_ON_PATH_JERK 20603[3] $MC_CURV_EFFECT_ON_PATH_JERK 20603[4] $MC_CURV_EFFECT_ON_PATH_JERK 20605[0] $MC_PREPDYN_SMOOTHING_FACTOR 20605[1] $MC_PREPDYN_SMOOTHING_FACTOR 20605[2] $MC_PREPDYN_SMOOTHING_FACTOR 20605[3] $MC_PREPDYN_SMOOTHING_FACTOR 20605[4] $MC_PREPDYN_SMOOTHING_FACTOR 20606[0] $MC_PREPDYN_SMOOTHING_ON DYNNORM...
  • Page 98 Parameterizing machine data 4.4 Machine data for Advanced Surface MD number Designation Default set‐ Recom‐ Data Parameter ting mendation class 32432[0] $MA_PATH_TRANS_JERK_LIM 1000000 1000000 DYNNORM 32432[1] $MA_PATH_TRANS_JERK_LIM 1000000 1000000 DYNPOS 32432[2] $MA_PATH_TRANS_JERK_LIM 1000000 1000000 DYNROUGH 32432[3] $MA_PATH_TRANS_JERK_LIM DYNSEMIFIN 32432[4] $MA_PATH_TRANS_JERK_LIM DYNFINISH 32620 $MA_FFW_MODE...

  • Page 99: Machine Data For An Analog Spindle

    The PROFIdrive telegram of the SINAMICS axis must be designed for two encoder actual values. Depending on MD11240 $MN_PROFIBUS_SDB_NUMBER, the standard SDB of SINUMERIK 828D supports Siemens telegram 116 or Siemens telegram 136. Functional restrictions: ● There is no setpoint telegram for the analog spindle; this means that the functionality based on the setpoint telegram is not available, e.g.
  • Page 100 Parameterizing machine data 4.5 Machine data for an analog spindle Relevant machine data The following machine data must be set for the analog spindle: ● Activation of the analog spindle: MD30100 $MA_CTRLOUT_SEGMENT_NR = 0 The analog spindle for the setpoint output is activated by setting the local bus as bus segment.
  • Page 101 Parameterizing machine data 4.5 Machine data for an analog spindle MD identifier Meaning MD30134 IS_UNIPOLAR_OUTPUT "0" means bipolar MD30200 NUM_ENCS Number of encoders MD30220[0] ENC_MODULE_NR[0] SMC30 on the Y axis MD30230[0] ENC_INPUT_NR[0] Input for second encoder MD30240 ENC_TYPE Encoder type MD identifier Meaning MD32250 RATED_OUTVAL...

  • Page 102: Managing Data

    Parameterizing machine data 4.6 Managing data Managing data Application The "Manage data" function is used to support and simplify the commissioning and provides functions for backing up, loading and comparing the following data: ● Machine data ● Setting data ● Drive data ●...

  • Page 103: How To Transfer Data Within The Controller

    Parameterizing machine data 4.6 Managing data Example of "transferring data within the control" Figure 4-1 Managing data 4.6.1 How to transfer data within the controller Transfer data within the control NOTICE Protection of the machine For safety reasons, the machine and setting data should only be transferred when the enable is locked.

  • Page 104: To Save And Load Data

    Parameterizing machine data 4.6 Managing data 4.6.2 To save and load data Save data to a file Procedure: 1. Select the "Save data to a file" option. 2. In the data structure, select the data that you want to save to a file and confirm with "OK". 3.

  • Page 105: How To Compare Data

    Parameterizing machine data 4.6 Managing data 4.6.3 How to compare data Compare data You can select different data sources for the data comparison: Store the current data in files on the controller or data. Procedure: 1. Select the "Compare data" option. 2.
  • Page 106 Parameterizing machine data 4.6 Managing data CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 107: Commissioning The Drive

    Commissioning the drive Commissioning the drive 5.1.1 Sample configuration – overview Configuration overview The principle sequence of the commissioning with SINUMERIK Operate is the same for SINAMICS S120 Combi and SINAMICS S120 Booksize. The procedure when configuring is therefore illustrated using the following examples: Example 1: SINAMICS S120 Combi without NX: ●...
  • Page 108 Commissioning the drive 5.1 Commissioning the drive Sample configuration The following examples refer to the following configuration: Figure 5-1 Example of the commissioning CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 109: Automatic First Commissioning

    Commissioning the drive 5.1 Commissioning the drive 5.1.2 Automatic first commissioning Automatic first commissioning Procedure: 1. After the complete drive system has powered-up, a dialog box for automatic device configuration is displayed: "A device configuration must be performed for the drive system (all drive devices."...
  • Page 110 Commissioning the drive 5.1 Commissioning the drive 3. The system then requests a warm start. Confirm with "Yes". This operation can take several minutes. 4. After the warm start you will receive an overview of the topology. Confirm with "OK" to continue the commissioning.
  • Page 111 Commissioning the drive 5.1 Commissioning the drive Configuration after the first commissioning In the "Configuration" window you can obtain a list of the connected components for the selected drive unit. You can identify the assignment of the components to the drive objects, e.g.

  • Page 112: Example: This Is How You Check The Infeed Configuration (S120 Combi)

    Commissioning the drive 5.1 Commissioning the drive 5.1.3 Example: This is how you check the infeed configuration (S120 Combi) Checking the infeed configuration The drive object was commissioned. The automatically determined characteristic data are displayed in the following overview (two pages): Data for the line filter, Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) and for the line voltage.

  • Page 113: Example: This Is How You Configure The Spindle (Do3)

    Commissioning the drive 5.1 Commissioning the drive The device connection voltage entered in the "Network data" dialog is displayed: This is the basis for monitoring the supply voltage (p0281 - p0283) for the alarm threshold and shutdown threshold. Figure 5-3 S120 Combi infeed (page 2) 5.1.4 Example: This is how you configure the spindle (DO3)
  • Page 114 Commissioning the drive 5.1 Commissioning the drive Procedure: 1. Select "Change" to configure the spindle: 2. The characteristic data of the automatic device configuration of the drive object (DO3) is displayed: Optionally, you can activate the function modules, which in some cases require a license. This way, further parameters become active, which are required for commissioning the relevant function module.
  • Page 115 Commissioning the drive 5.1 Commissioning the drive 3. Select "Next step" >. To configure the motor, select "Select standard Siemens motor from the list": First select the motor type. In order to restrict the list for selecting the motors, enter text in the "Search"...
  • Page 116 Commissioning the drive 5.1 Commissioning the drive 5. Select "Next step" >. Here you can assign a maximum of three encoders to the selected SERVO: If the Sensor Module (SMx) is already inserted correctly on the SERVO, then it is automatically assigned here.
  • Page 117 Commissioning the drive 5.1 Commissioning the drive 6. Select "Next step" >. The name of the encoder and the Sensor Module are displayed here via which the encoder is connected. – Case 1: Automatically selected with EnDat and DRIVE-CLiQ, no further settings required.
  • Page 118 Commissioning the drive 5.1 Commissioning the drive 8. Confirm the encoder data with "OK". 9. Select "Enter data >". CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 119 Commissioning the drive 5.1 Commissioning the drive 10.Confirm the encoder data with "OK". CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 120 Commissioning the drive 5.1 Commissioning the drive 11.Select "Next step" >. Default setting: The control type, PROFIBUS telegram and the number of DDS are generally pre-assigned correctly. Here you set the control type and the PROFIBUS telegram type as well as the number of DDS.
  • Page 121 Commissioning the drive 5.1 Commissioning the drive 12.Select "Next step" >. Make the following selection with both of these checkboxes: – Default setting: "SINUMERIK-compliant interconnection for the terminal wiring" This means that the BICO interconnections for the terminal wiring are set in such a way that all enables and responses communicate correctly.
  • Page 122 Commissioning the drive 5.1 Commissioning the drive 13.Select "Next step" >. All data with which the drive object has been configured is displayed in the summary. Option: Activate "Save text to file" to save the configuration data in a text file. CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 123 Commissioning the drive 5.1 Commissioning the drive 14.Select the "Finish >" softkey to exit the commissioning of this drive object. In case of changes, a query to save is output. 15.To ensure that the data after power ON/OFF is retained, confirm with "Yes". The data is saved to the CompactFlash card and installed in a commissioning archive with drive data.

  • Page 124: Example: This Is How You Configure An Encoder For An Axis (Do4)

    Commissioning the drive 5.1 Commissioning the drive 5.1.5 Example: This is how you configure an encoder for an axis (DO4) Configuring encoder 2 for the axis Drive object DO4 was commissioned with the automatic device configuration. ● Encoder 1 was detected. ●...
  • Page 125 Commissioning the drive 5.1 Commissioning the drive 3. Select "Next step >" until you have accessed the "Encoder assignment" dialog: 4. Select "Next step >": Encoder 1 was detected. The name of the encoder and the Sensor Module are displayed here via which the encoder is connected.
  • Page 126 Commissioning the drive 5.1 Commissioning the drive 5. Select "Next step >". Encoder 2 was not automatically detected ("no encoder") and must still be configured: If the connected encoder is in the list, select the encoder based on the designation / code number.
  • Page 127 Commissioning the drive 5.1 Commissioning the drive 8. Encoder 2 is configured and is displayed as "User-defined". 9. Select "Next step >" until the following summary is displayed: Option: Activate "Save text to file" to save the configuration data in a text file. CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 128: Example: This Is How You Check The Configuration Of An Axis (Do6)

    Commissioning the drive 5.1 Commissioning the drive 10.Select "Ready >" to exit the configuration. 11.Select "Yes" to save the configuration in a non-volatile fashion. The axis has now been commissioned. 5.1.6 Example: This is how you check the configuration of an axis (DO6) SERVO DO6: Checking the encoder Drive object DO6 was commissioned with the automatic device configuration.
  • Page 129 Commissioning the drive 5.1 Commissioning the drive Procedure: 1. This is demonstrated using the following example: CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 130 Commissioning the drive 5.1 Commissioning the drive 1. Select "Change >". 2. Select "Next step >". In this case, the Sensor Module (SMx) is already inserted correctly on the SERVO and it is automatically assigned. More than one measuring system can also be assigned automatically.
  • Page 131 Commissioning the drive 5.1 Commissioning the drive 4. Press the "Identify" softkey for encoder 1. 5. Select "Next step >". 6. Press the "Identify" softkey for encoder 2. CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 132 Commissioning the drive 5.1 Commissioning the drive 7. Confirm with "OK" and select "Next step >" until the following summary is displayed: Option: Activate "Save text to file" to save the configuration data in a text file. 8. Select "Ready" to exit the configuration. The axis has now been commissioned.

  • Page 133: Example: This Is How You Configure The Infeed (S120 Booksize)

    Commissioning the drive 5.1 Commissioning the drive 5.1.7 Example: This is how you configure the infeed (S120 Booksize) Configuring the infeed (S120 Booksize) Procedure: 1. Select "Change" to configure the infeed: Figure 5-4 Infeeds > Overview 2. The characteristic data of the infeed detected with the automatic device configuration is displayed: Figure 5-5 Infeeds >...
  • Page 134 Commissioning the drive 5.1 Commissioning the drive The following functions can also be activated: – If you activate the "LED to flash for recognition" option, then the selected infeed will flash alternately red-green. – Select the filter type which is connected in front of the infeed from the list under "Line filter".
  • Page 135 Commissioning the drive 5.1 Commissioning the drive 3. Select "Next step >". Figure 5-6 Infeeds > Line data The following supply system data is configured: – When selecting the checkbox, the line/intermediate circuit identification is activated once the pulse is enabled of the infeed (p3410). The infeed then switches to operational mode. Note DC link identification If the line supply environment changes or the components on the intermediate circuit...
  • Page 136 Commissioning the drive 5.1 Commissioning the drive 4. Select "Next step >". Figure 5-7 Infeeds > Terminal wiring Use a line contactor to electrically isolate the drive line-up and the DC link from the line supply. The checkbox for the infeed is selected by default. This means that the BICO interconnection (ON/OFF, both directions) is set with the first commissioning in accordance with the default setting.
  • Page 137 Commissioning the drive 5.1 Commissioning the drive 5. Select "Next step >". All data with which the infeed has been configured is displayed in the summary: Figure 5-8 Infeeds > Summary Further actions: – Option: The summary can be saved in a text file. –...
  • Page 138 Commissioning the drive 5.1 Commissioning the drive 6. Select "Finish". In the event of changes, a save query is issued in each case: If you save the data, then it is retained upon Power On/Off. The data is saved on the CompactFlash card and can therefore be saved in a commissioning archive.
  • Page 139 Commissioning the drive 5.1 Commissioning the drive 7. Select "Yes" Figure 5-10 Drive screen 8. Select "Cancel" to check the overview of the infeed. Figure 5-11 Overview of the infeeds (page1) CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 140: Replacing A Sinamics S120 Component

    Commissioning the drive 5.1 Commissioning the drive Figure 5-12 Overview of the infeeds (page2) 5.1.8 Replacing a SINAMICS S120 component Replacing a Motor Module The replacement of components after the first commissioning, e.g. in order to use an ALM with a higher power 16 kW →...

  • Page 141: Example: Parallel Connection With Tm120

    Commissioning the drive 5.1 Commissioning the drive 5. The configuration data of the new module is read in. 6. Update the drive data in the commissioning archive with the new configuration data. 5.1.9 Example: Parallel connection with TM120 Topology Application: Four motors connected in parallel M1 ...

  • Page 142: Exchanging Process Data

    Commissioning the drive 5.1 Commissioning the drive Actions Depending on the topology, the following actions must be performed on the TM120: 1. TM120 between the Motor Module and the SMx Sensor Module This TM120 evaluates four KTYs => sensor types must be selected by Servo-p4610/TM- p4100.
  • Page 143 The system data block is selected via MD11240 $MN_PROFIBUS_SDB_NUMBER = n. References Further details on the process data can be found in: ● SINUMERIK 828D List Manual, "Machine Data" ● SINAMICS S120 Function Manual, Section "Communication" ● SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual, at "Function diagrams" CNC commissioning...

  • Page 144: Assigning Axes

    Commissioning the drive 5.2 Assigning axes Assigning axes 5.2.1 Example: This is how you assign the axes Assigning axes Procedure: 1. After you have finally saved the configuration data, change to the following overview: 2. To assign a real axis to every logical drive, select the "Axis assignment" softkey: CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 145 Commissioning the drive 5.2 Assigning axes 3. Mark the uppermost selection field for the "Setpoint: Axis → drive". 4. Select "AX1:MSP1" for the spindle from the selection list. 5. Mark the next selection field for the "Actual value: Encoder → axis" and assign a measuring system in accordance with the table below.

  • Page 146: Example: Setting Machine Data For An Axis/Spindle

    Commissioning the drive 5.2 Assigning axes Data backup The configuration data is backed up after commissioning in the non-volatile memory with the "Save data" vertical softkey: Figure 5-14 Message to back up data 5.2.2 Example: Setting machine data for an axis/spindle Axis machine data After the commissioning in the previous example, the following values are set for the axis machine data:...
  • Page 147 Commissioning the drive 5.2 Assigning axes Spindle machine data To operate the spindle in the previous example in JOG mode after commissioning the drive, enter the new values for the following machine data: Spindle machine data Default setting New value MD32000 $MA_MAX_AX_VELO 10000...
  • Page 148 Commissioning the drive 5.2 Assigning axes Note DSC operation Requirement: Telegram ≥ 116; SINAMICS drive parameters: ● p1192[0] encoder selection ● p1193[0] encoder adaptation factor The parameterization of the following combination is not permitted: $MA_STIFFNESS_CONTROL_ENABLE=1 and $MA_ENC_FEEDBACK_POL=-1 The encoder inversion must be performed in the drive parameter p0410 bit 1 of the SINAMICS drive: ●...

  • Page 149: Commissioning Auxiliary Axes

    Typical applications for auxiliary axes are, for example, the tool or workpiece change. In addition to the NC axes, you can connect up to two auxiliary axes to a SINUMERIK 828D via one SINAMICS CU320-2 PN or two SINAMICS CU310-2 PN.
  • Page 150 Commissioning the drive 5.3 Commissioning auxiliary axes Configuration examples The two following examples each show a configuration with two auxiliary axes: Figure 5-15 Configuration example 1 Components required for two auxiliary axes: 2 x SINAMICS CU310-2 PN Control Units 2 x SINAMICS PM340 Power Modules CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 151 Commissioning the drive 5.3 Commissioning auxiliary axes Figure 5-16 Configuration example 2 Components required for two auxiliary axes: 1 x SINAMICS CU320-2 PN Control Unit 2 x SINAMICS PM340 Power Modules 2 x SINAMICS CUA32 Control Unit Adapters CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 152: Example: Commissioning Auxiliary Axes

    Commissioning the drive 5.3 Commissioning auxiliary axes 5.3.2 Example: Commissioning auxiliary axes Commissioning for configuration example 1 Procedure: 1. Activate the auxiliary axes by setting the following machine data: – MD30460 $MA_BASE_FUNCTION_MASK bit 8 = 1 for each auxiliary axis "MQ2" and"MQ3".

  • Page 153: Topology Rules For Drive-Cliq

    Optional: 2nd direct sin/cos encoder for spindle (via SMx20) Remains empty when connecting a direct TTL spindle encoder via X220 In this case, the TTL encoder interface X220 remains free Assignment of the DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces on the SINUMERIK 828D (PPU) DRIVE-CLiQ interface Connection to X100...

  • Page 154: Topology Rules For S120 Booksize

    Commissioning the drive 5.4 Topology rules for DRIVE-CLiQ DRIVE-CLiQ interface Connection to X202 Motor encoder for feedrate 2nd expansion axis (via Sensor Module) Double Motor Module: X200 X101 of the PPU X201 Remains empty X202 Motor encoder for feedrate 1st expansion axis X203 Motor encoder for feedrate 2nd expansion axis Remains empty if only one Single Motor Module is used.
  • Page 155 Commissioning the drive 5.4 Topology rules for DRIVE-CLiQ In addition to the binding wiring rules that must be observed, some additional recommendations as well as topology examples for DRIVE-CLiQ wiring are provided in the PPU manual. The components used in these examples can be removed, replaced with others or supplemented.
  • Page 156 Commissioning the drive 5.4 Topology rules for DRIVE-CLiQ ● The following applies to the booksize format: – In the servo control and vector U/f control operating modes, only one Line Module may be connected to the Control Unit. In the vector control operating mode, a maximum of three further Line Modules may be connected in parallel (i.e.
  • Page 157 Commissioning the drive 5.4 Topology rules for DRIVE-CLiQ ● The sampling times (p0115[0] and p4099) of all components that are connected to a DRIVE- CLiQ line must be divisible by one another with an integer result. If the current controller sampling time on a DO has to be changed to another pattern that does not match the other DOs on the DRIVE-CLiQ line, the following options are available: –...

  • Page 158: Topology Rules For Smc40

    Commissioning the drive 5.4 Topology rules for DRIVE-CLiQ Note If an additional encoder is connected to a Motor Module, it is assigned to this drive as encoder 2 in the automatic configuration. At a Double Motor Module, an encoder at X201 is assigned to the 2nd feedrate as 2nd measuring system.
  • Page 159 Commissioning the drive 5.4 Topology rules for DRIVE-CLiQ NOTICE Display in the "Topology" dialog The SMC40 is only integrated into the actual topology if the DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces X500/x and the corresponding encoder interfaces X520/x are assigned. Without a connected encoder, it is also not possible to subsequently integrate the SMC40 in the topology.

  • Page 160: Terminal Assignments

    Commissioning the drive 5.5 Terminal assignments Terminal assignments 5.5.1 Terminal assignment at X122 and X132 X122: Digital inputs/outputs of the PPU Signal name Status Meaning r722.0 Digital input 0 r722.1 Digital input 1 r722.2 Digital input 2 r722.3 Digital input 3 DI16 DI16 r722.16...

  • Page 161: Terminal Assignment At X242 And X252

    Commissioning the drive 5.5 Terminal assignments 5.5.2 Terminal assignment at X242 and X252 X242 pin assignment Signal name NC variable Meaning Not connected Not connected DIN1 $A_IN[1] Digital NC input 1 DIN2 $A_IN[2] Digital NC input 2 DIN3 $A_IN[3] Digital NC input 3 DIN4 $A_IN[4] Digital NC input 4...
  • Page 162 Commissioning the drive 5.5 Terminal assignments Signal name NC variable Meaning DOUT12 ● Without analog spindle: Digital NC output 12 ● With analog spindle: Travel direction of the analog spindle (in accordance with MD30134 $MA_IS_UNIPOLAR_OUTPUT) MEXT3 Ground for pins 9, 10, 12, 13 NOTICE Shielded signal cables for analog signals To ensure safe, fault-free operation of the system, shielded cables with shield connection...

  • Page 163: Example: Circuitry For A Cu With Line Contactor

    Commissioning the drive 5.5 Terminal assignments 5.5.3 Example: Circuitry for a CU with line contactor Example The circuitry shown refers to the assignment of the terminals in the previous chapters. Figure 5-20 Circuitry for a Control Unit with line contactor Smart Line Module connection The connections for the digital in/outputs X122 and X132 are on the rear side of the control.
  • Page 164 Signal output of the control, to avoid interference of the 24 VDC supply on the EP terminal. ⑩ Connect via BICO to parameter p0864 → X122.1 Figure 5-21 Example: SLM connection ON/OFF1 enable: Connection of Smart Line Module pin X21.1 → X122.1 SINUMERIK 828D CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 165: Inputs/Outputs (Dialog)

    Connect further input and output signals to the PLC I/O: ● DI → PLC inputs ● DO → PLC outputs See also Additional information can be found in: ● SINUMERIK 828D Manual PPU ● SINAMICS S120 Manual Booksize Power Units 5.5.4 Inputs/outputs (dialog) Support for the terminal assignment The following overview shows the terminal assignment of those drive units involved in the SINAMICS drive line-up.

  • Page 166: Interconnections (Dialog)

    Commissioning the drive 5.5 Terminal assignments Axis/spindle test run Drive: Parameter/terminal Meaning p0840 ON/OFF1 p0844 1. OFF2 p0845 2. OFF2 p0848 1. OFF3 p0849 2. OFF3 p0852 Enable operation X21.3 (+24 V) and X21.4 (ground) EP terminals enable (pulse enable) p0864 Infeed enable p1140...

  • Page 167: Connecting The Probes

    5.5.6 Connecting the probes Connecting the probes The probes are connected to both the SINUMERIK 828D CU and the NX: 1. Probe at terminal X122 pin 13 / X122 pin 13 of the NX CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 168 The 1st probe is connected to terminal X122 pin 13, the 2nd probe to terminal X132 pin 13 of the SINUMERIK 828D and - if present - on the NX10 module to terminal X122 pin 12. A precondition is the switchover of pin X132.13 from output to input.

  • Page 169: Configuring Data Sets

    Commissioning the drive 5.6 Configuring data sets Configuring data sets 5.6.1 Data sets - overview Requirement Note The particular drives must have been already commissioned. Data sets The data sets are configured in the "Commissioning" → Drive system" → "Drives" → "Data sets" operating area.

  • Page 170: Adding A Data Set

    Commissioning the drive 5.6 Configuring data sets References You can find additional information in: SINUMERIK 840D sl/828D Basic Functions Function Manual, various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) 5.6.2 Adding a data set Adding a data set operating sequence The default factory setting specifies an MDS0 motor data set with a DDS0 drive data set and an EDS0 encoder data set: CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 171 Commissioning the drive 5.6 Configuring data sets 1. Press "Add data set". In the example, the maximum number of four MDSes are created. 2. Press "Next step >". In the first step, the DDS1 to DDS7 drive data sets are created in the MDS0. CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 172 Commissioning the drive 5.6 Configuring data sets 3. Press "Next step >". The MDS1 motor data set is created. 4. Press "Next step >". The MDS2 motor data set is created. CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 173 Commissioning the drive 5.6 Configuring data sets 5. Press "Next step >". The MDS3 motor data set is created. 6. Press "Next step >". You need to create a complete MDS as shown in the following diagram, or as an option, enter the number of DDS for the MDSx: CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 174 Commissioning the drive 5.6 Configuring data sets 7. Press "Next step >" to check in the summary the changes to be performed. 8. Press "Finish >" to accept the changes. 9. Confirm with "OK" to save the data in non-volatile memory. The saving/writing of the parameters can take several minutes.
  • Page 175 Commissioning the drive 5.6 Configuring data sets 10.The "Drives" → "Overview" dialog of the drive object is displayed. The "Select MDS >" softkey is now available. Press "Select MDS...". In the direct selection, select the motor data set, e.g. in this case MDS1. 11.Press "OK"...

  • Page 176: Remove Data Set

    Commissioning the drive 5.6 Configuring data sets 5.6.3 Remove data set Precondition To remove data sets, the following conditions must be met: ● Number of DDS > 1 in the MDS ⇒ DDSes can be removed. ● Number of MDS > 1 ⇒ MDSes can be removed. CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 177 Commissioning the drive 5.6 Configuring data sets Operating sequence to remove a data set 1. Select "Remove data set": In the first column, select the MDS to be removed by marking the row with a check mark. Several data sets can also be selected. 2.
  • Page 178 Commissioning the drive 5.6 Configuring data sets 3. Press "Next step >". "Cancel" terminates this process and the data set overview with MDS0 ... MDS3 is displayed. 4. Press "Finish >" to accept the changes. The data is written to the parameters. The results are then displayed: When you exit this dialog, press "Yes"...

  • Page 179: Modify Data Set

    Commissioning the drive 5.6 Configuring data sets 5.6.4 Modify data set Precondition If more than one encoder is assigned to the drive object (SERVO), additional encoder data sets (EDS0 ... 2) will be created. Modify data set To change the assignment of these encoder data sets for the associated encoder, select the "Modify data sets"...
  • Page 180 Commissioning the drive 5.6 Configuring data sets CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 181: Tuning

    Tuning Control response Function overview Use the "Automatic servo tuning" function to tune the current, speed and position control loop with feedforward control. The objective is the fine setting of an axis or spindle using SINUMERIK Operate: ● Performing frequency response measurements ●...
  • Page 182 Tuning 6.1 Control response connected via the motor encoder, the position control loop can be connected via the motor encoder or via the direct measuring system. Precondition The dynamic stiffness control is set before automatic tuning. MD32640[0] $MA_STIFFNESS_CONTROL_ENABLE = 1 This then permits a position control with a faster cycle time.
  • Page 183 Tuning 6.1 Control response See also The following sections describe the individual steps for tuning control loops with SINUMERIK Operate: ● Automatic servo tuning (Page 170) ● Axis jerk (Page 183) ● Torque load (Page 191) ● Spindle tuning (Page 195) ●...

  • Page 184: Automatic Servo Optimization

    Tuning 6.2 Automatic servo optimization Automatic servo optimization 6.2.1 Options before the start Starting the function Procedure: 1. Start the "Automatic servo tuning" function in the "Commissioning" operating area → "Optim./ test" softkey. 2. Use the cursor keys to mark the axis and select with the <SELECT> softkey, for example, the X1 axis: CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 185: Selecting The Tuning Strategy

    Tuning 6.2 Automatic servo optimization The dialog indicates whether an axis has already been tuned. A tuned axis is marked with the date and time of the tuning. Selecting options Check whether all options for an automatic procedure are set: "Options" softkey. This permits tuning by pressing a single softkey.
  • Page 186 Tuning 6.2 Automatic servo optimization Figure 6-2 "Strategy: axis" - default setting 102 For the "Axis" strategy, select which controller should be tuned. When doing this, the tuned control loop can be measured to check the results. When selecting the "User-defined strategy (108)"...
  • Page 187 Tuning 6.2 Automatic servo optimization Example for "Speed": Strategy 303 Figure 6-4 "Strategy: n/v controller" - example The most important settings are: Tuning aggressiveness and minimum integral time Tn. ● Tuning aggressiveness: This parameter determines the setting of Kp and Tn based on stability limits. Depending on this setting, the values for the phase reserve and amplitude reserve are pre-assigned.
  • Page 188 Tuning 6.2 Automatic servo optimization Example for "Position": Strategy 203 Figure 6-5 "Strategy: Position control loop" - example The values for the Kv reduction and Kv upper limit depend on what has been selected as tuning objective. ● Kv reduction: This parameter specifically reduces the maximum Kv calculated by the automatic servo tuning function.
  • Page 189 Tuning 6.2 Automatic servo optimization ● Maximum responsiveness: The speed and position controller gain (servo gain factor) is tuned with maximum values and minimum ruggedness. Application: High-speed machining with maximum suppression of all disturbing forces such as friction, teeth of the drive belt, strong cutting forces, when machining titanium, for example.

  • Page 190: How To Start The Automatic Servo Optimization

    Tuning 6.2 Automatic servo optimization 6.2.3 How to start the automatic servo optimization Starting automatic servo tuning Procedure: 1. Ensure that the axis to be tuned is in a safe position. If this is not the case, traverse the axis in JOG mode to the center of the travel path: 2.
  • Page 191 Tuning 6.2 Automatic servo optimization 3. Further displays appear on the screen during the automatic tuning procedure. Press the <CYCLE START> key several times to start the next measurement: CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 192 Tuning 6.2 Automatic servo optimization 4. On completion of the tuning, the following display appears in which the new values and the original values should be checked. Example: Position controller Example: Speed controller The new values are accepted when the "Accept" softkey is pressed. 5.

  • Page 193: This Is How You Start Path Interpolation

    Tuning 6.2 Automatic servo optimization Tuning result The date and time of the tuning are then output: The other axes are also tuned in the same manner: 6.2.4 This is how you start path interpolation Introduction Interpolation means that the axes to perform the contour must exhibit the same trailing error. After the tuning of the individual axes, they have different control settings that are optimum only for the associated axis.
  • Page 194 Tuning 6.2 Automatic servo optimization ● (1103) Path tuning without reducing the speed controller gain Path tuning and adaptation of the equivalent times: After axis tuning, the equivalent times of the controllers are set differently for each axis. In strategy 1103, the path tuning is aligned with adaptation of the equivalent times. The equivalent times in MD32800 for torque feedforward control and in MD32810 for speed feedforward control are increased to the highest time constants of all interpolating axes.
  • Page 195 Tuning 6.2 Automatic servo optimization Path interpolation In the next step, the axes for the path interpolation are selected. Procedure: 1. Press the "Path interpolation" softkey. The axes that interpolate together are assigned to "Channel 1". 2. Press the "Edit & tune" softkey. 3.
  • Page 196 Tuning 6.2 Automatic servo optimization This completes the automatic tuning. CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 197: Optimizing The Axis Jerk

    Tuning 6.3 Optimizing the axis jerk Optimizing the axis jerk 6.3.1 Checking the axis jerk Jerk limitation The jerk-limited acceleration is optimized in the next step: The jerk is used to smooth the acceleration and response behavior by applying a time for changing the acceleration. The jerk is defined in units/s , i.e.

  • Page 198: Parts Program For Axis Jerk

    Trace function cannot be determined. In general, jerk values between 20 and 100 are used for machines with SINUMERIK 828D. The test program should move the axis over an adequate distance so that the programmed feedrate velocity can be attained.

  • Page 199: Selecting Trace Signals

    Tuning 6.3 Optimizing the axis jerk To check the positioning behavior without the effect of the position controller, the K position- control gain factor should be set to 0. Specify positioning tolerances to prevent errors during the test: ● MD32200 $MA_POSCTRL_GAIN = 0 ●...
  • Page 200 Tuning 6.3 Optimizing the axis jerk 3. Press the "Filter/search" softkey to limit the list of variables. The following filters are available: – System variables – NC – Axis – Channel – Mode groups (MGs) – Servo – Global user data (GUD) –...
  • Page 201 Tuning 6.3 Optimizing the axis jerk Trace result The axis moves and the selected signals are monitored for five seconds. The result is then displayed: Setting the trace scale It is necessary to view that part of the trace in which the axis reaches the position setpoint. To view this in detail, set the trace scale: "Display trace"...

  • Page 202: Optimizing The Jerk Setting

    Tuning 6.3 Optimizing the axis jerk View in detail: Position setpoint (yellow) and actual position (green) do not match because the position controller is not active. 6.3.4 Optimizing the jerk setting Tuning objective The jerk must be set so that the actual position is not exceeded. This is done by setting a jerk value that is too high.
  • Page 203 Tuning 6.3 Optimizing the axis jerk The following machine data is first checked and set: ● MD32200 $MA_POSCTRL_GAIN = 0 ● MD32610 $MA_VELO_FFW_WEIGHT = 1 ● MD32620 $MA_FFW_MODE = 3 ● MD32810 $MA_EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME = as tuned The following examples show the effects of different jerk values on the positioning of an axis. Examples The MD32431 axis machine data is used to set the jerk.
  • Page 204 Tuning 6.3 Optimizing the axis jerk Example: Positioning with feedforward control and active position controller If the jerk has been tuned, the position controller and the feedforward control must be activated. Set the machine data as required: ● MD20150[23] =2 The feedforward control can then be released as default setting. ●...

  • Page 205: Torque Load

    Tuning 6.4 Torque load Torque load Checking the maximum axis acceleration To ensure that the torque limit is not reached, after tuning the Kv factor and the feedforward control, check the torque loading under unfavorable conditions: ● At high velocity ●...
  • Page 206 Tuning 6.4 Torque load "Start trace" softkey → <RESET> → <CYCLE START>: The three traces are displayed together; press the "Adapt all" softkey: To recognize the maximum values of the three traces, press the "Cursors" softkey and position it on the associated trace to mark the maximum values: "Cursors" softkey → "Cursor A" softkey. CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 207 Tuning 6.4 Torque load To check the maximum values of the three traces, press the "Cursors" softkey and position the cursor on the associated trace to read the maximum values of the following quantities: ● Velocity The cursor positioned over the trace shows that the attained maximum velocity is 36 m/min: ●...
  • Page 208 Tuning 6.4 Torque load In this example, p0640 was = 18 A Consequently the load is 18 A x 58.52/100 = 10.53 A The test was performed on the Y axis of a milling machine with a dividing unit on the table. The load of 58% permits an additional weight to be added without problem.

  • Page 209: Optimize The Spindle

    Tuning 6.5 Optimize the spindle Optimize the spindle 6.5.1 Set the machine data for the spindle Checking the machine data settings Match the machine data default settings as well as all relevant parameters for spindle/axis interpolation with the machine data in the following table. The example is true for a spindle motor without mechanical gearbox stages with 8000 rpm.

  • Page 210: Spindle: Checking The Speed Controller

    Tuning 6.5 Optimize the spindle Number Designation Value Meaning MD35200[0] $MA_GEAR_STEP_SPEEDCTRL_ACCEL Acceleration in speed control mode: as tuned MD35200[1] $MA_GEAR_STEP_SPEEDCTRL_ACCEL MD35210[0] $MA_GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL Acceleration in position control mode: as tuned MD35210[1] $MA_GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL MD35500 $MA_SPIND_ON_SPEED_AT_IPO_START 2 Feed enable with spindle in setpoint range MD35550[0] $MA_DRILL_VELO_LIMIT 4000 Maximum speeds for tapping...
  • Page 211 Tuning 6.5 Optimize the spindle Motor data sheet Example: 1PH8089-1VM02-0MG1 induction motor Figure 6-6 1PH8 induction motor Accelerating and decelerating with the original data of the motor corresponds to the S1 curve. Number Designation Value p0640 Current limit (p0305 motor rated current * 1.5) 17.7 A p1520 CO: Torque limit upper/motorized M_max upper/mot...
  • Page 212 Tuning 6.5 Optimize the spindle Trace recording Procedure: 1. Use the following key combination to invoke the Trace function: <MENU SELECT> → "Diagnostics" operating area, menu forward key → "Trace" softkey 2. To select the required variables: "Select variable" softkey –...
  • Page 213 Tuning 6.5 Optimize the spindle 6. Press the "Settings" softkey. 7. Confirm with "OK". 8. Enter the following program in the MDI: S8000 M03 G04 F5 9. Initialize the trace and execute the program: "Trace" softkey → "Display trace" softkey → "Start trace" softkey → <RESET> key → <CYCLE START>...
  • Page 214 Tuning 6.5 Optimize the spindle Use the cursor keys to set the acceleration time. ● Trace selection: Actual speed (Trace 1) The cursor is positioned at the trace start and at the point where the speed setpoint is attained. Time needed for acceleration to the speed setpoint = 2.5 seconds ●...
  • Page 215 Tuning 6.5 Optimize the spindle Checking the acceleration The acceleration/deceleration can be changed using the motor datasheet through to the maximum values, although this depends on the associated application. Enter appropriate values for the application. In our example, a short acceleration/braking time is requested. Number Designation Value...

  • Page 216: Spindle: Checking The Position Controller

    Tuning 6.5 Optimize the spindle 6.5.3 Spindle: Checking the position controller Testing the position controller A test can now also be performed to set the acceleration and jerk of the position control. This test is performed by tapping without using a compensating chuck. Procedure: 1.
  • Page 217 Tuning 6.5 Optimize the spindle 4. Use the "Settings" softkey to select the trace trigger, etc. The example shows a trace that is initiated when the actual position exceeds five degrees. The trace is recorded for ten seconds. 5. Start the trace and press <CYCLE START> on the machine control panel. Examples Because the load reaches 64% in the following example, the position-control acceleration can be increased.
  • Page 218 Tuning 6.5 Optimize the spindle Spindle: Load 88% CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 219: Circularity Test

    Tuning 6.6 Circularity test Circularity test 6.6.1 Circularity test: Function The circularity test serves to set and assess the dynamic response for interpolating axes and to analyze the contour accuracy on the quadrant transitions (circular contours) achieved by means of friction compensation. The circularity test is used to check the interpolation of the axes which work together.

  • Page 220: Circularity Test: Performing The Measurement

    Tuning 6.6 Circularity test Result The best contour results are achieved when the circular form test results are in the correct actual size, shape and minimum p/p deviation between a combined interpolation of the axes (X-Y, X-Z, Y-Z). An NC program in the MDA operating mode and the circularity test function are used to measure and evaluate these results.
  • Page 221 Tuning 6.6 Circularity test Enter the following parameters to carry out a measurement: ● "Measurement": Selection of the two axes that are intended to be measured and selection of the measurement system. Parked encoders are not displayed for selection. ● "Parameter": The parameter settings in the "Radius" and "Feed" input fields must correspond to the values from the part program that controls the circular motion of the axes, taking account of the feed override switch setting.

  • Page 222: Circularity Test: Examples

    Tuning 6.6 Circularity test Displaying a graphic To display the measurement result as a graphic, press the "Graphic" softkey. 6.6.3 Circularity test: Examples The MD32400 $MC_AX_JERK_ENABLE axial jerk limitation is set via a time constant and is always active. Machine data for setpoint filter: ●...
  • Page 223 Tuning 6.6 Circularity test This circle displays the results after the feed precontrol has been optimized. However, the mean radius is 0,0019 mm too large: X1: active measuring system Parameter Z1: active measuring system Radius: 10.00000 mm Feedrate: 3000.00000 mm/min Measure‐...
  • Page 224 Tuning 6.6 Circularity test Feedrate: 3000.00000 mm/min Measurement 1257 ms time: active measuring system active measuring system Representation Resolution: 0.01000 mm Representation: mean radius Radius: 10.00029 mm Delta R: 25.47002 μm Example 3 for optimization This circle shows the effect of a considerably different time constant for the axial jerk filter. The time constant is adapted in order to correct this type of error: Parameters / machine data X axis...

  • Page 225: Circularity Test: Saving Data

    Tuning 6.6 Circularity test 6.6.4 Circularity test: Saving data The following data can be backed up with the circularity test: ● Save parameters: The parameters entered can be saved as a file. The following path is the default path: user/sinumerik/hmi/log/optimization/cicular/ <name>.sup ●...
  • Page 226 Tuning 6.6 Circularity test P 2: 3000 [Feed] P 3: 3770 [Measuring time] P 4: 0 [Measuring system Axis 1 - 0: active; 1:first; 2: second] P 5: 0 [Measuring system Axis 2 - 0: active; 1:first; 2: second] @Representation P 10: 10 [Resolution] P 11: 9 [mean / prog.

  • Page 227: Friction Compensation With Adaptive Characteristics

    You do not have to select the "With compensation data" option. ⇒ SINUMERIK 828D: In order to avoid that tuning results are lost, it is recommended that you create a data class archive of the type "INDIVIDUAL" that contains the friction compensation data of the last complete measurement series.

  • Page 228: Axis Selection And Status Display

    Tuning 6.7 Friction compensation with adaptive characteristics References For more information, please refer to the Function Manual, Extended Functions, Chapter Compensations (K3). 6.7.1 Axis selection and status display What is displayed in this dialog? In the dialog "Axis selection for automatic tuning", for each channel, select the axes for automatic friction compensation.

  • Page 229: Friction Compensation - Automatic Tuning

    Tuning 6.7 Friction compensation with adaptive characteristics Commissioning archive: The tuning results in the axis machine data and also the tuning status of the axes are backed up in the "NC data" commissioning archive. If the commissioning archive with the tuning data from machine A is read into machine B, then the NC data are completely read in.

  • Page 230: Friction Compensation - Manual Tuning

    Tuning 6.7 Friction compensation with adaptive characteristics Procedure: 1. The radius and the feedrate for the measurements are preset in the following channel setting data and apply for all axes in the channel. Designation Unit Machine data Radius (linear axis) SD55820 $SCS_FRICT_OPT_RADIUS Radius (rotary axis) °...
  • Page 231 Tuning 6.7 Friction compensation with adaptive characteristics the tuning. The measurement consists of an initialization phase and the actual measuring process. The current status is displayed at the bottom right in the status line via a progress indicator. Procedure: 1. Press the "Axis +" or "Axis -" softkey to select the axis for which you activated friction compensation.
  • Page 232 Tuning 6.7 Friction compensation with adaptive characteristics 5. The first step with the first feedrate of the measurement series is selected. Enter the friction compensation values in the following entry fields: Input field Unit Machine data Amplitude [mm/min] MD32571 $MA_FRICT_VELO_STEP or [°/min] Decay time MD32574 $MA_FRICT_V_PULSE_DECAY_TIME...

  • Page 233: Data List

    Tuning 6.7 Friction compensation with adaptive characteristics ● "Previous step" softkey to return to the previous feedrate. ● "Data list" softkey to switch to the list of machine data. ● "Cancel" softkey to cancel the recording and reject the entries. ●...
  • Page 234 Tuning 6.7 Friction compensation with adaptive characteristics Step 4 of 8: 140 mm/min Amplitude: 23.848 mm/min Decay time: 0.038 s Step 5 of 8: 1060 mm/min Amplitude: 84.688 mm/min Decay time: 0.015 s Step 6 of 8: 1410 mm/min Amplitude: 90.018 mm/min Decay time: 0.014 s Step 7 of 8: 1770 mm/min Amplitude: 109.839 mm/min...

  • Page 235: Friction Compensation With Torque Injection Pulse

    Tuning 6.7 Friction compensation with adaptive characteristics 6.7.6 Friction compensation with torque injection pulse Parameterizing machine data The following axis machine data must be parameterized in order to use an acceleration- dependent torque injection pulse also for friction compensation: Designation Unit Machine data Acceleration-dependent amplitude of the...
  • Page 236 Tuning 6.7 Friction compensation with adaptive characteristics Enter a factor between -1.0 and 1.0 in MD32588 $MA_FRICT_T_STEP[0...9] for each acceleration value in order to weight the amplitude of the torque injection pulse. CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 237: Service Planner

    Service Planner Overview Using the service planner dialog at the user interface or programming tool, time intervals and alarm sequences for the tasks to be processed (mainly machine maintenance tasks) can be edited, started, deactivated or reactivated. The numeric data of the tasks is organized in data blocks and provided in the user interface for the HMI, PLC user program and programming tool.
  • Page 238 Service Planner Interfaces and configuration Figure 7-1 Service Planner - interfaces CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 239: Interfaces In The Plc User Program

    During the configuration of these messages, so-called alarm responses can be selected, e.g. the machine is "disabled" after a Power OFF message. The alarm messages are configured after specification of the SINUMERIK 828D PLC messages. The texts are entered with the alarm text editor. Then the texts are available for the operating software: ●...
  • Page 240 Service Planner 7.1 Interfaces in the PLC user program DB9903 Initial data table [r16] DBW14 Reserved 2 DBW248 Interval 32 [h] DBW250 Time of first warning 32 [h] DBW252 Number of warnings to be output 32 DBW254 Reserved 32 Interval: Number of hours after which the maintenance must be performed. When this time expires, the warning or alarm bit belonging to the task is set for the last time.
  • Page 241 Service Planner 7.1 Interfaces in the PLC user program DB9904 Actual data table [r16] DBW252 Reserved_1 32 DBW254 Reserved_2 32 Remaining time: Number of hours remaining after the start of the task until it expires. Remaining time ≠ 0 and associated alarm bit set: Warning Remaining time = 0 and associated alarm bit set: Alarm Number of warnings output: Number n of warnings that have already been output.
  • Page 242 Service Planner 7.1 Interfaces in the PLC user program After the setting of the associated acknowledgment bit, the remaining time is set to the interval time and the number of output warnings is zero - assuming the associated acknowledgment blocking bit is not set. DB1800: Alarms DB1800 Warnings/Alarms [r]...
  • Page 243 Service Planner 7.1 Interfaces in the PLC user program DB1800 Acknowledgment block [r/w] DBB5002 Acknowl‐ Acknowl‐ Acknowl‐ Acknowl‐ Acknowl‐ Acknowl‐ Acknowl‐ Acknowl‐ edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment block 24 block 23 block 22 block 21 block 20 block 19 block 18 block 17...

  • Page 244: Interfaces To The Operating Software

    Service Planner 7.2 Interfaces to the operating software Interfaces to the operating software Overview To process these service/maintenance tasks, you have the following options: ● Managing the data in the PLC user program using the programming tool. ● Creating the maintenance tasks via an XML interface. Using this segmentation, inconsistencies between the PLC block and the XML scripts are avoided if the PLC block is changed in the PLC user program via the programming tool or as a result of a commissioning archive.
  • Page 245 Service Planner 7.2 Interfaces to the operating software Note Number assignment A number is automatically assigned when a task is created. If this is not desirable, then the tasks must be configured with the corresponding numbers. This is recommended, for example, if task m is deleted by mistake and this has to be created again under the same number because of the evaluation in the PLC user program.
  • Page 246 Service Planner 7.2 Interfaces to the operating software CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 247: This Is How You Import And Export Maintenance Tasks

    Service Planner 7.3 This is how you import and export maintenance tasks This is how you import and export maintenance tasks Overview In the dialog, there are two soft keys that can be used to read-in and read-out the configuration files with the maintenance tasks: ●...
  • Page 248 Service Planner 7.3 This is how you import and export maintenance tasks task.xml <MAINTENANCE_TASK> <TASK_ID>0</TASK_ID> <INTERVALL>3</INTERVALL> <FIRST_WARNING>1</FIRST_WARNING> <NUMBER_OF_WARNING>1</NUMBER_OF_WARNING> </MAINTENANCE_TASK> <MAINTENANCE_TASK> <TASK_ID>1</TASK_ID> <INTERVALL>3</INTERVALL> <FIRST_WARNING>2</FIRST_WARNING> <NUMBER_OF_WARNING>1</NUMBER_OF_WARNING> </MAINTENANCE_TASK> <MAINTENANCE_TASK> <TASK_ID>2</TASK_ID> <INTERVALL>3</INTERVALL> <FIRST_WARNING>2</FIRST_WARNING> <NUMBER_OF_WARNING>1</NUMBER_OF_WARNING> </MAINTENANCE_TASK </MAINTENANCE> Structure of the oem_maintenance_<lng>.ts file This file has the extension ".ts" and contains all the language-dependent warning texts that were entered in the dialog.
  • Page 249 Service Planner 7.3 This is how you import and export maintenance tasks oem_maintenance_<lng>.ts </message> . . . <message> <source>32</source> <translation>Maintenance task 32</translation> <chars>44</chars> </message> </context> </TS> Editing text entries The maintenance texts are entered in the dialog with the values for the interval, time of the first warning and the number of warnings.

  • Page 250: Acknowledging Maintenance Tasks

    Service Planner 7.4 Acknowledging maintenance tasks Acknowledging maintenance tasks Acknowledging maintenance tasks After completion of the maintenance activities, the maintenance tasks are acknowledged by the PLC user program or in the dialog of the operating software using the "Maintenance completed" softkey. The acknowledgment bit for the maintenance task is set by making the acknowledgment in the dialog, the PLC then deletes "Number of output warnings/alarms"...

  • Page 251: Easy Extend

    Easy Extend Function of Easy Extend Objective Easy Extend provides you with a simple facility for commissioning, activating, deactivating or testing optional equipment. The available equipment and device states are displayed in a list by the control system. The system can manage a maximum of 64 devices. Softkeys are used to activate or deactivate a device.
  • Page 252 Easy Extend 8.1 Function of Easy Extend To use Easy Extend, the following functions should be configured by the machine manufacturer: ● PLC ↔ SINUMERIK Operate interface The optional devices are managed via the interface between the user interface and the PLC.

  • Page 253: Configuration In The Plc User Program

    Easy Extend 8.2 Configuration in the PLC user program Configuration in the PLC user program Loading configurations The configurations created are transferred to the manufacturer directory of the control, with the script and text file. Additionally, the corresponding PLC user program should be loaded. Programming the equipment Communication between the operator component and the PLC takes place in the PLC user program via data block DB9905, in which 128 words are reserved to manage a maximum of...
  • Page 254 Easy Extend 8.2 Configuration in the PLC user program See also This is how you create a commissioning archive (Page 338) CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 255: Option Bits For Machine Manufacturers And Dealers

    Easy Extend 8.3 Option bits for machine manufacturers and dealers Option bits for machine manufacturers and dealers Distribution of the option bits The option bits are managed in blocks of 16 bits. According to the default setting, block 3 is reserved for dealers.
  • Page 256 Easy Extend 8.3 Option bits for machine manufacturers and dealers Example of a fixed assignment: <device option_bit="bit number"> </device> Example ① ② ③ ④ Block-by-block assignment: ① DB9905.DBB0 Device 1 ② DB9905.DBB4 Device 2 ③ DB9905.DBB192 Device 49 ④ DB9905.DBB196 Device 50 Assignment to free locations: ①...

  • Page 257: Display On The User Interface

    Easy Extend 8.4 Display on the user interface Display on the user interface Dialogs on the user interface The following dialogs are available for Easy Extend: ● The control offers a configurable dialog, in which the available devices are shown. ●...

  • Page 258: Generating Language-Dependent Text

    Easy Extend 8.5 Generating language-dependent text Generating language-dependent text Replacement characters for language-dependent text The system offers the option of defining CONTROL properties (attribute values) during runtime. In order to use this function, the desired property must be set in a local variable and the variable name must be transferred to the tag as an attribute value preceded by $ characters.
  • Page 259 Easy Extend 8.5 Generating language-dependent text <translation>my_device2</translation> <chars>64</chars> </message> <message> <source>form_caption_device2</source> <translation>my_input_form</translation> <chars>64</chars> </message> </context> </TS> CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 260: Examples

    Easy Extend 8.6 Examples Examples 8.6.1 Example with parameters to support the commissioning Examples of additional parameters If a device requires the input of parameters for the activation, program a dialog for the input of these parameters which is opened with the "Additional parameters" softkey. The "Additional parameters"...
  • Page 261 Easy Extend 8.6 Examples <caption>selected machine data</caption> <DATA_ACCESS type="true" /> <!-- switch-on the direct access to the NC variables --> <control name = "edit1" xpos = "322" ypos = "34" refvar="$MN_AXCONF_MA- CHAX_NAME_TAB[0]" /> <control name = "edit2" xpos = "322" ypos = "54" refvar="$MN_AXCONF_MA- CHAX_NAME_TAB[1]"...

  • Page 262: Example With Control Elements

    Easy Extend 8.6 Examples <text xpos = "23" ypos = "34">AXCONF_MACHAX_TAB[0]</text> <text xpos = "23" ypos = "54">AXCONF_MACHAX_TAB[1]</text> <text xpos = "23" ypos = "74">AXCONF_MACHAX_TAB[2]</text> <text xpos = "23" ypos = "94">AXCONF_MACHAX_TAB[3]</text> <text xpos = "23" ypos = "114">Is rot axis 1</text> <text xpos = "23"...

  • Page 263: Example Of A Power Unit

    8.6.3 Example of a power unit Note The two examples are also supplied on the SINUMERIK 828D Toolbox → Examples. Activating the drive object The drive object to be activated has already been commissioned and deactivated again by the machine manufacturer to market the axis (axes) as an option.
  • Page 264 Easy Extend 8.6 Examples <data name = "$MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[4]">5</data> <data name = "drive/dc/p971[DO5]">1</data> <while> <condition> "drive/dc/p971[DO5]" !=0 </condition> <while> <control_reset resetnc ="true" resetdrive = "true"/> </SET_ACTIVE> <SET_INACTIVE> <data name = "drive/dc/p105[DO5]">0</data> <data name = "$MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[4]">0</data> <data name = "drive/dc/p971[DO5]">1</data> </while> <condition> "drive/dc/p971[DO5]" !=0 </condition> </while>...

  • Page 265: Tool Management

    Tool management Fundamentals 9.1.1 Tool Management - Overview Tool management (TM) The tool management (TM) function ensures that the right tool is in the right location on the machine at all times. Machines, magazines, loading positions and tool buffers (e.g. spindles, grippers) form a specific system in which the tools are stored and transported.

  • Page 266: Structure Of The Tool Management

    As far as the range of functions is concerned, the NC part of this documentation is also valid for the SINUMERIK 828D. The description of the PLC functions and the communication between NC and PLC in this manual is not valid for the SINUMERIK 828D. ● SINUMERIK 828D List Manual: "Machine data"...
  • Page 267 Tool management 9.1 Fundamentals ● PLC: – Execute tool change – Move tools in the magazine – Gripper control – Magazine control if applicable – Safety interlocks – Provision of the structure of tool movements in transfer step tables – Acknowledgment of the tool movements with acknowledgment step tables ●...

  • Page 268: Components Of The Tool Management

    Tool management 9.1 Fundamentals 9.1.3 Components of the tool management Tool list, magazines, magazine list Circular and chain magazines can be managed. Other types of magazines are mapped on these. Loading points or loading stations shall be used as the magazine type for loading and unloading.
  • Page 269 Tool management 9.1 Fundamentals For the allocation of locations, one is fixed, all other locations can be assigned freely. Location 1 in the loading magazine is used for the fixed assignment. Location 1 is reserved for loading/ unloading to all spindles/tool holders. All positioning and relocation jobs to any locations (not loading points) are still handled via location 1.

  • Page 270: Multitool

    Tool management 9.1 Fundamentals The programming command T = identifier initiates the tool change. T = location can be programmed as an alternative. If T = location, no tool need actually be stored in the location. Description of the buffers and loading points: Magazine Location Meaning...

  • Page 271: Manual Tools

    Tool management 9.1 Fundamentals The functionality effects the following interfaces: ● NC programming language (data definition for the tool selection, tool change, tool movements) ● NC variables (data definition and visualization) ● NC/PLC interface The description of the programming and the multitool data can be found in the following references: References SINUMERIK 840D sl Function Manual Tool Management...
  • Page 272 Tool management 9.1 Fundamentals Unique identification of manual tools A manual tool is allocated a unique identifier, $TC_TP8[T_No] bit 15 =1. If this state is set, a search is not made for an empty location in a magazine for the tool - and this (old) tool is directly transported to the virtual magazine location 9999/1 when the tool is changed.

  • Page 273: Machine Data For The Tool Management

    Tool management 9.2 Machine data for the tool management Machine data for the tool management Machine data (default setting) The following machine data has already been preset for tool management or will be set with "default data" during booting: These settings can be changed as necessary. Number Name Default...
  • Page 274 Tool management 9.2 Machine data for the tool management Part program: N10 T="Drill18" ; Tool change preparation N20 M6 ; Tool change subprogram called Tool change subprogram L6: N10 M206 ; Tool change N20 D0 : Compensation deselected N40 Y150 M79 ;...
  • Page 275 Tool management 9.2 Machine data for the tool management MD52270: $MCS_TM_FUNCTION_MASK Tool management function mask MD52270: $MCS_TM_FUNCTION_MASK Bit 0: Creating a tool at the magazine location is not permitted. Tools can only be created outside of the magazine. Bit 1: Load/unload lock, if the machine is not in the reset state.
  • Page 276 $MN_EXTERN_TOOLPROG_MODE = 4 Programming T101 and T0101 leads to the same result: T1 H01 References: SINUMERIK 828D / 840D sl Function Manual: ISO dialects ● The description "Substitution by a replacement cycle for a tool selection block" is valid for the ISO mode (G291).

  • Page 277: Nc ↔ Plc User Interface

    Tool management 9.3 NC ↔ PLC user interface NC ↔ PLC user interface Overview The tool management receives tasks for preparing and carrying out a tool change (T command, M06), a tool movement (MVTOOL) or magazine positioning (POSM) from the part program or from SINUMERIK Operate.
  • Page 278 Tool management 9.3 NC ↔ PLC user interface Loading/unloading and relocating Loading/unloading and relocating: Tool movement (MVTOOL) or magazine positioning (POSM) from the part program or SINUMERIK Operate xx: Loading station index y : Index of the TO unit ● 40xx y000 Acknowledgments from the PLC user program for loading/unloading and relocating, magazine positioning ●...

  • Page 279: Relocating, Unloading, Loading Tool, Positioning Magazine

    Tool management 9.3 NC ↔ PLC user interface 9.3.1 Relocating, unloading, loading tool, positioning magazine Tool and magazine movements Per loading point there is one interface for: ● Jobsfor loading, unloading and relocating a tool (MVTOOL) and for magazine positioning (POSM).
  • Page 280 Tool management 9.3 NC ↔ PLC user interface Interface signal Meaning DB41xx.DBBy104 Tool management: Feedback error status DB41xx.DBXy108.0 - Map of acknowledgments for load, unload, relocate or position DB41xx.DBXy111.6 magazine. This map belongs to the positive or negative feed‐ back and remains valid for the same time. DB41xx.DBWy124 –...
  • Page 281 Tool management 9.3 NC ↔ PLC user interface Jobs: Signal description Signal description: ● Job: The interface contains a job. Job processing has not yet been completed with an end acknowledgment. This signal is reset after transmission of the end acknowledgment to the tool management.
  • Page 282 Tool management 9.3 NC ↔ PLC user interface ● Multitool: Tool distance Value for the distance coding: Tool location number in the multitool, or angle or distance of the tool within the multitool ● Multitool: Number T number of the multitool ●...
  • Page 283 Tool management 9.3 NC ↔ PLC user interface Acknowledgments: Signal description Signal description: ● Total acknowledgment: At a 0/1 edge, the end acknowledgment, with status 99, is sent to the current job (job complete, all target positions have been reached). As long as the signal is present, no changes may be made to the data of this interface! This signal is reset by the PLC firmware after the acknowledgment has been transferred to the tool management.
  • Page 284 Tool management 9.3 NC ↔ PLC user interface DB4100...41xx Signals from tool management [r] DBBy111 Reserved Acknowl‐ Acknowl‐ Acknowl‐ Acknowl‐ Acknowl‐ Acknowl‐ Acknowl‐ edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment step 30 step 29 step 28 step 27 step 26 step 25 step 24 DBWy112...
  • Page 285 Tool management 9.3 NC ↔ PLC user interface Diagnostics number Meaning There is no job for a position specification The status does not permit a location change (acknowledgment status 0 is used) An impermissible acknowledgment status has been used Other values: The number corresponds to the error message of the tool management in the NC caused by this transfer.

  • Page 286: Tool Change

    Tool management 9.3 NC ↔ PLC user interface 9.3.2 Tool change Interface description Per tool holder/spindle there is one interface for: ● Jobs for preparing and executing the tool change. Message to the PLC user program: Job active; job specification and job description. The jobs appear in the tool holder interface (of the spindle) where a tool is to be exchanged.
  • Page 287 Tool management 9.3 NC ↔ PLC user interface Interface signal Meaning DB43xx.DBWy006 – DBWy034 Job description DB43xx.DBXy100.0 Positive feedback: Acknowledgment status, acknowledgment OK, one PLC cycle pending DB43xx.DBXy100.1 Negative feedback: Acknowledgment status, acknowledgment er‐ ror, static pending DB43xx.DBXy100.0 Positive feedback: Acknowledgment status, one PLC cycle pending DB43xx.DBXy100.1 Negative feedback: Acknowledgment status, static pending DB43xx.DBXy100.0...
  • Page 288 Tool management 9.3 NC ↔ PLC user interface DB4300...43xx Signals from tool management [r] DBBy032 Tool status for a new tool: Tool has Tool fixed- Tool be‐ Prewarn‐ Measur‐ Tool disa‐ Tool ena‐ Active tool been in location ing limit ing tools bled bled...
  • Page 289 Tool management 9.3 NC ↔ PLC user interface Jobs: Signal description Signal description: ● Job: The interface contains a job. Job processing has not yet been completed with an end acknowledgment. This signal is reset after transmission of the end acknowledgment to the tool management.
  • Page 290 Tool management 9.3 NC ↔ PLC user interface ● Multitool: Number of locations Number of tool locations available in the multitool ● Multitool: Tool distance Value for the distance coding: Tool location number in the multitool, or angle or distance of the tool within the multitool ●...
  • Page 291 Tool management 9.3 NC ↔ PLC user interface DB4200 ... 42xx Signals to tool management [r/w] DBBy009 Job ac‐ Resetting knowledg‐ the acknowl‐ ment edgment er‐ DBBy10 Reserved y [= 0 or 1]: TO unit 1 or TO unit 2 xx: Tool holder Acknowledgments: Signal description Signal description:...
  • Page 292 Tool management 9.3 NC ↔ PLC user interface DB4300...43xx Signals from tool management [r] DBBy108 Acknowl‐ Acknowl‐ Acknowl‐ Acknowl‐ Acknowl‐ Acknowl‐ Acknowl‐ Acknowl‐ edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment edgment step 7 step 6 step 5 step 4 step 3 step 2 step 1 step 0...
  • Page 293 Tool management 9.3 NC ↔ PLC user interface Error status When an error occurs, a diagnostics number not equal to zero is displayed in DB43xx.DBB104 with the following meaning: Diagnostics number Meaning No error Multiple acknowledgment signals at the same time Acknowledgment without job Invalid transfer step number There is no job for a position specification...

  • Page 294: Transfer-Step And Acknowledgment-Step Tables

    Tool management 9.3 NC ↔ PLC user interface DB4300 ... 43xx Signals from tool management [r] DBWy144 Multitool: Tool distance (FLOAT) DBWy146 DBWy148 Multitool: Location number (INT) y [= 0 or 1]: TO unit 1 or TO unit 2 xx: Tool holder 9.3.3 Transfer-step and acknowledgment-step tables Configurable step tables...
  • Page 295 Tool management 9.3 NC ↔ PLC user interface DB9900 Constant transfer-step table [r] … DBW504 Transfer step 64 Source magazine number (INT) DBW506 Transfer step 64 Source location number (INT) DBW508 Transfer step 64 Target magazine number (INT) DBW510 Transfer step 64 Target location number (INT) DB9901 Variable transfer-step table [rw]...
  • Page 296 Tool management 9.3 NC ↔ PLC user interface DB9902 Acknowledgment-step table [r] DBB118 Acknowledgment step 30 Acknowledgment status (BYTE) DBB119 Acknowledgment step 30 reserved See also PLC Program Blocks (Page 283) CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 297: Plc Program Blocks

    Tool management 9.4 PLC Program Blocks PLC Program Blocks 9.4.1 Acknowledgment process Information to tool management The tool management expects acknowledgment of its orders in order to track and carry the actual tool positions. At least one acknowledgment is required for each order. This is sufficient for many applications.
  • Page 298 Tool management 9.4 PLC Program Blocks Synchronous acknowledgment ● Acknowledgment of the intermediate steps of a job (tool management registers the current position changes of tools, part program must wait). The tool management is informed of intermediate steps of a job by an intermediate acknowledgment.

  • Page 299: Acknowledgment States

    Tool management 9.4 PLC Program Blocks 9.4.3 Acknowledgment states Acknowledgment states and their meaning: The status indicated by the respective type of acknowledgment is shown in the following table: Acknowledgment Meaning Synchronous end ac‐ Job finished at the specified position: knowledgment The tools are in the positions specified.
  • Page 300 Tool management 9.4 PLC Program Blocks Acknowledgment status Old tool Transfer step ‑ ‑ ‑ ‑ ‑ ‑ ‑ ‑ ‑ ‑ ● from magazine ‑ ‑ ‑ ‑ ‑ ‑ ● from location ‑ ‑ ‑ ‑ ● to magazine ●...
  • Page 301 Tool management 9.4 PLC Program Blocks Typical sequence of any job with total acknowledgment Signal description: ① The PLC user program recognizes from the 0/1 edge of the signal DB43xx.DBX0.0 (job) that a new job has been assigned by the tool management. ②...
  • Page 302 Tool management 9.4 PLC Program Blocks Program L6 is called with M6 (basic setting) Signal description: ① The PLC user program receives a new job. The job "prepare tool change" and the job "execute tool change" are issued one after the other. Txx and M206 have been programmed in separate NC blocks.

  • Page 303: Configuring Step Tables

    Tool management 9.4 PLC Program Blocks Signal description: ① The PLC user program receives a new job. The job "prepare tool change" and the job "execute tool change" are issued simultaneously. Txx and M206 have been programmed in one NC block. ②...
  • Page 304 Tool management 9.4 PLC Program Blocks Configuring the transfer steps Any changes to the tool and magazine positions must be communicated to the tool management by the PLC user program. A table of all mechanical single movements which should be acknowledged / communicated helps with this. For each tool transfer, the table contains the corresponding tool start and target position, or for positioning a magazine location at a transfer point (change, load, unload point), the magazine position and the name of the transfer point.
  • Page 305 Tool management 9.4 PLC Program Blocks Transfer step Address Name Start value Comment DB9900 SrcMag_2 Source magazine number of the transfer step 10.0 SrcPos_2 Source position number of the trans‐ fer step 12.0 DstMag_2 9998 Target magazine number of the transfer step 14.0 DstPos_2...

  • Page 306: Configuring Acknowledgment Steps

    Tool management 9.4 PLC Program Blocks Example as a complete step Transfer Comment step Magazine Location Magazine Location 9998 "Prepare tool change": The magazine is positioned at the changing point. The source position must be entered by the PLC user program. 9998 "Prepare tool change": Tool from mag‐...

  • Page 307: Adjust The Plc User Program

    Tool management 9.4 PLC Program Blocks Example as a complete step Acknowledg‐ Transfer step Acknowledg‐ Comment ment step ment status New tool old tool "Cancel order" command. Prepare Tool: The tool is taken from the magazine (changing point) and placed in‐ to gripper 1.

  • Page 308: Information On Magazine Location

    Tool management 9.4 PLC Program Blocks For example: ● Turns of a circular magazine ● Loading/unloading (only for systems without additional buffers such as handling systems, loaders, etc.) ● Changing manual tools ● Positioning a magazine Rules for acknowledgment If intermediate steps are useful, several rules must be observed during acknowledgment: The PLC user program must ensure that all acknowledgments are transferred correctly to the tool management.
  • Page 309 Tool management 9.4 PLC Program Blocks Variable $TC_MPP2 with index 7: Location type Parameter assignment: Read variable from Address Signal Valid values the NC DB1200.DBX0.0 Start DB1200.DBX0.1 Write variable DB1200.DBB1 Number of variables 1 … 8 Parameter DB120x.DBW1000 Variables index DB120x.DBW1002 Location number 1 …...
  • Page 310 Tool management 9.4 PLC Program Blocks Read variable from Address Signal Valid values the NC Result DB1200.DBX2000.0 Job completed DB1200.DBX2000.1 Error in job DB120x.DBX3000.0 Variable is valid DB120x.DBB3001 Access result 0/3/5/10 DB120x.DBW3004 Data from NC variable Legend: n = 1 blocked n = 2 free (<>...
  • Page 311 Tool management 9.4 PLC Program Blocks 9.4.8 PI service: TMMVTL Function With program instance service TMMVTL, it is possible to initiate a job to relocate a tool from the PLC. After an error-free "PI Start," the tool management performs an empty location search in the target magazine for the tool on the defined source location.

  • Page 312: Example: Loading/Unloading

    Tool management 9.5 Example: Loading/unloading Example: Loading/unloading Programming For loading, tools are placed directly in the magazine or the spindle; for unloading, they are removed directly from the magazine. Normally, a single acknowledgment from the operator or the PLC user program (tool holder is closed again) is sufficient as a message that the process is complete.
  • Page 313 Tool management 9.5 Example: Loading/unloading The tools can be oversized or fixed-location coded. Loading via the spindle with preselection of a magazine location You can create a new tool directly on the spindle or, using the "load" dialog, move a tool from the tool list, which is not located in the magazine, to the spindle.

  • Page 314: Example: Change Manual Tools

    Tool management 9.6 Example: Change manual tools Example: Change manual tools Programming In MD22562: $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE bit 1=1, additional tools without magazine allocation have been selected by the NC part program. The selected tool must be inserted in the machine manually and removed again manually after machining ("manual tools").
  • Page 315 Tool management 9.6 Example: Change manual tools Synchronous acknowledgment The tool is no longer in the spindle. Transfer step From Comment Magazine Loca‐ Magazine Location tion 9998 9999 Tool removed from the spindle DB9900.DBW40 Acknowledg‐ Acknowledgment bit Transfer step for Transfer step for Status ment step...
  • Page 316 Tool management 9.6 Example: Change manual tools Synchronous acknowledgment The old tool is no longer in the spindle. Transfer step From Comment Magazine Loca‐ Magazine Loca‐ tion tion 9998 9999 Asynchronous message, unload the tool from the spindle DB9900.DBW40 Acknowledg‐ Acknowledgment Transfer step for the Transfer step for the...
  • Page 317 Tool management 9.6 Example: Change manual tools End acknowledgment Acknowledg‐ Acknowledgment Transfer step for the Transfer step for the Status ment step new tool old tool DB4200.DBXx.x The step New tool from gripper 1 to spindle can be omitted and replaced by a total acknowledgment.

  • Page 318: Application Example For Turning Machine

    Tool management 9.7 Application example for turning machine Application example for turning machine 9.7.1 Example: Turning machine with revolver magazine (MAGKONF_MPF) Example file You can find the program for configuring the magazine in the Toolbox. The program can be read into the control and should be adjusted for the specific machine concerned.
  • Page 319 Tool management 9.7 Application example for turning machine See also You will find a precise description of the parameters used in the Tool Management Function Manual of SINUMERIK 840D sl. Example MAG_CONF_MPF 1. Plant configuration: – 1 revolver magazine with 8 locations (can be set up in N40) –...
  • Page 320 Tool management 9.7 Application example for turning machine N220; Delete old data when magazine 1 is set up N230 if NUM_MAG ==1 N240 $TC_MAP1[0]=0 ; Delete magazine N250 $TC_DP1[0,0]=0 ; Delete Tools N260 STOPRE N270 endif ; Configuration N280 $TC_MAMP2= PLACE_SEARCH ;...
  • Page 321 Tool management 9.7 Application example for turning machine N540 $TC_MAP2[9998]="BUFFER"<<NUM_MAG N550 $TC_MAP3[9998]=17 ; Magazine status N560 $TC_MAP6[9998]=1 ; Number of lines N570 $TC_MAP7[9998]=NUM_BUFFER ; Number of locations ; Locations in the buffer ;Spindle N580 $TC_MPP1[9998,1]=2 ; Location type (here spindle) N590 $TC_MPP2[9998,1]=0 ;...
  • Page 322 Tool management 9.7 Application example for turning machine N880 $TC_MPP4[9999,PLACE]=2 ; Location status N890 $TC_MPP5[9999,PLACE]=PLACE ; Location type index N900 endfor N910 STOPRE N920; Offsets (clearances) ; Clearances to magazine ; Buffer N930 for PLACE=1 to NUM_BUFFER N940 $TC_MDP2[1,PLACE]=0 N950 endfor N960 STOPRE ;Loading points N970 for PLACE=1 to NUM_LOAD...

  • Page 323: Example: Acknowledgment Steps (Turning Machine)

    Tool management 9.7 Application example for turning machine Display in operating software Figure 9-4 Turning machine tool list 9.7.2 Example: Acknowledgment steps (turning machine) Acknowledgment steps Generally, the mechanical sequences on a turning machine are simpler than those for a milling machine.

  • Page 324: Example: Tool Change Cycle For Turning Machine

    Tool management 9.7 Application example for turning machine Figure 9-5 Programming in PLC user program An asynchronous message can be used for magazine movements without a job from the tool management. Acknowledgment to tool management: Acknowledgment Acknowledgment bit Transfer step new Transfer step old Status step...
  • Page 325 Tool management 9.7 Application example for turning machine Programming In the programming example, a job for positioning the magazine with POSM is output at the interface. During the magazine positioning, the block processing of the NC must be controlled by the PLC user program. In most cases, it is useful to set the load or feed disable during this time.

  • Page 326: Example: Block Search And Mcall

    Tool management 9.7 Application example for turning machine Supplementary conditions The following supplementary conditions must be observed for an active T function replacement (default setting for turning): ● The cycle defined in MD10717 $MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME and executed with the T call, is not started with the TCA command. To ensure that a tool change cycle can also be started when TCA is programmed, the language command TCA must be redefined in _TCA (default setting NC).

  • Page 327: Example: Turning Machine With Counterspindle

    Tool management 9.7 Application example for turning machine Programming example N100 IF $P_MC == TRUE ; MCALL is active N110 IF $AC_ASUP <> 0 ; Call is performed via search ASUB or overstore → do not select MCALL N140 ELSE N150 MCALL N160 ENDIF...

  • Page 328: Example: Transporting A Tool From A Buffer Into The Magazine

    Tool management 9.7 Application example for turning machine Once the order has been successfully executed, the results are entered starting from DB1200.DBB3000: Read variable from the NCK Address Signal Values Parameter DB1200.DBW1000 Variables index DB1200.DBW1002 Location number DB1200.DBW1004 Magazine number 9998 DB1201.DBW1000 Variables index...

  • Page 329: Example: Repeat "Prepare Tool Change" Order

    Tool management 9.7 Application example for turning machine Start PI Services in the NCK Address Signal Values area Result DB1200.DBB5000.0 Job completed DB1200.DBX5000.1 Error in job DB410x.DBX0.0 delivers an order to relocate the tool from the buffer. The target location in magazine 1 is in DB4100.DBW12.

  • Page 330: Application Example For Milling Machine

    Tool management 9.8 Application example for milling machine Application example for milling machine 9.8.1 Example: Milling machine with chain magazine and dual gripper (MAGKONF_EXAMPLE_MPF) Example file You can find the program for configuring the magazine in the Toolbox. The program can be read into the control and should be adjusted for the specific machine concerned.
  • Page 331 Tool management 9.8 Application example for milling machine Description of the program To start with, all the old magazine definitions and tools are deleted. As the program sequence continues, all magazines and buffers are newly created and assigned by writing the magazine parameters.
  • Page 332 Tool management 9.8 Application example for milling machine N50 NUM_BUFFER = 3 ;Number of buffers (spindle, grip- per) N60 NUM_LOAD = 1 ; Number of loading points N70 PLACE_SEARCH = 12289 ; Type of search strategy ;= 257 Bit13=0 no exchange of the old tool on the location of the new tool ;Setting for pickup magazine ;=12289 Bit13=1 exchange old tool on the location of the new tool ;Setting for chain magazine...
  • Page 333 Tool management 9.8 Application example for milling machine N370 $TC_MAP5[NUM_MAG]=-1 N380 $TC_MAP6[NUM_MAG]=1 ; Number of lines in magazine N390 $TC_MAP8[NUM_MAG]=0 N400 $TC_MAP9[NUM_MAG]=0 N410 $TC_MAP7[NUM_MAG]=LOCATIONS ; Number of magazine locations N420 $TC_MAP10[NUM_MAG]=PLACE_SEARCH ; Magazine locations N430 for PLACE=1 to LOCATIONS N440 STOPRE N450 $TC_MPP1[NUM_MAG,PLACE]=1...
  • Page 334 Tool management 9.8 Application example for milling machine N720 STOPRE N730; Definition of loading magazine (always number 9999) N740 $TC_MAP1[9999]=9 ; Magazine type 9: Loading magazine N750 $TC_MAP2[9999]="LOADING MAGA- ZINE"<<NUM_MAG N760 $TC_MAP3[9999]=17 ; Magazine status N770 $TC_MAP4[9999]=-1 N780 $TC_MAP5[9999]=-1 N790 $TC_MAP6[9999]=1 ;...

  • Page 335: Flow Chart: Tool Change

    Tool management 9.8 Application example for milling machine Display in operating software Figure 9-7 Tool list Milling machine 9.8.2 Flow chart: Tool change Tool change program sequence (PLC) The sequence described here describes the change between magazine and spindle. The changing of manual tools as well as loading and unloading are not taken into account.
  • Page 336 Tool management 9.8 Application example for milling machine A tool change command (M206) must always precede a prepare tool change command. A change command without a previous "Prepare tool change" job will not initiate a job from the tool management. You will find the expression 1:1 change in the program sequence.
  • Page 337 Tool management 9.8 Application example for milling machine "Tool change" flow diagram Figure 9-8 Flow diagram CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 338 Tool management 9.8 Application example for milling machine Description of the sequence: ● NC program: T command or T command with simultaneous tool change call (M6) ● Interface signals: Job from TOOLMAN: DB43xx.DBX0.0 (job bit) and DB43xx.DBB1 (command bits): Prepare change (DB43xx.DBX1.2) ●...
  • Page 339 Tool management 9.8 Application example for milling machine 9998 DB9901.DBW0 n: is the actual location number (n ≠ 0) to be entered by the PLC user program in the variable transfer table. → Continue with Step 4 Step 3: Position magazine, location from old tool to changing point ←...
  • Page 340 Tool management 9.8 Application example for milling machine Similarly to Step 1, it is checked whether a direct change or a change in two steps is to be executed: ● 1:1 change possible: → Continue with Step 6 ● 1:1 change not possible: → Continue with Step 9 Step 6: Old tool from spindle to gripper 2 and new tool from magazine to gripper 1 ←...
  • Page 341 Tool management 9.8 Application example for milling machine Transfer step From Magazine Location Magazine Location 9998 DB9900.DBW24 → Continue with Step 8 Step 8: End acknowledgment ← Previous step: Step 7 or Step 14 End acknowledgment takes place with tool changeover in the initial setting, or in a state where the machine can continue machining.
  • Page 342 Tool management 9.8 Application example for milling machine Step 10: Old tool from gripper 2 to magazine ← Previous step: Step 9 The PLC program controls the machine functions with which the gripper movements, tool clamping, etc. are performed. As soon as the mechanical movements are completed and acknowledged in the PLC user program, the tool movements are acknowledged to the tool management.
  • Page 343 Tool management 9.8 Application example for milling machine Step 13: New tool from magazine to gripper 1 ← Previous step: Step 12 The PLC user program controls the machine functions used to execute gripper movements, tool clamp‐ ing, etc. Acknowledgment to TOOLMAN: Acknowledgment Acknowledgment Transfer step new...

  • Page 344: Example: Acknowledgment Steps (Milling Machine)

    Tool management 9.8 Application example for milling machine 9.8.3 Example: Acknowledgment steps (milling machine) Constant transfer step table Transfer step Comment Magazine Loca‐ Magazine Loca‐ tion tion 9998 New tool from magazine to gripper DB9900.DBW0 ⑥ ⑬ Step 9998 9998 ⑥...

  • Page 345: Example: Tool Change Cycle For Milling Machine

    Tool management 9.8 Application example for milling machine Acknowledgment step table Acknowledgment Transfer step Acknowledg‐ Comment step ment status Old tool New tool End acknowledgment, ④ ⑧ DB9902.DBW0 Step Cancel order DB9902.DBW4 Intermediate acknowledgment ④ for subsequent order, Step DB9902.DBW8 Variable magazine location to changing point DB9902.DBW12...
  • Page 346 Tool management 9.8 Application example for milling machine IF(NOT $P_SEARCH) ; if no block search _WZ_IN_SP=$TC_MPP6[9998,1] ; tool in spindle GETSELT(_WZ_VOR) ; previously selected tool IF(_WZ_IN_SP<>_WZ_VOR) ; if another tool SPOS=_SPP ; position spindle ; approach tool change position: G75 Z=0 WAITS(1) ENDIF ELSE...

  • Page 347: Easy Archive

    Easy Archive 10.1 Backing up and archiving data Overview In line with the data segregation in data classes, an archive can be created separately for each data area and for each data class. The data class "System" is an exception. This data is set permanently and becomes effective at the first installation or a default initialization.

  • Page 348: Which Data Is Backed Up In The Archive

    Easy Archive 10.2 Which data is backed up in the archive? 10.2 Which data is backed up in the archive? When should you back up the start-up data? The following times are recommended for performing a data backup: ● After commissioning ●...
  • Page 349 Easy Archive 10.2 Which data is backed up in the archive? Components Data NC data ● Compile cycles ● Standard and user cycles ● Definitions and macros ● Machine data ● Setting data ● Option data ● Global (GUD) and local (LUD) user data ●...
  • Page 350 The commissioning archives are saved taking into account the data classes (*.ard). The drive data is saved as binary data which cannot be edited. Compatibility of the PLC data SINUMERIK 802D sl PLC archives can be transferred to a SINUMERIK 828D control variant using the Programming Tool. Memory areas for archives Archives can be stored in the following memory areas: ●...

  • Page 351: This Is How You Back Up Just The Machine Data That Have Changed

    Easy Archive 10.3 This is how you back up just the machine data that have changed 10.3 This is how you back up just the machine data that have changed Requirement The access level "Service" is required. Delta backup only for machine data that has changed Using the general MD11210 $MN_UPLOAD_MD_CHANGES_ONLY, you can set whether all machine data should be backed up in the archive, or only the machine data that differs from the default setting:...

  • Page 352: This Is How You Create A Commissioning Archive

    Easy Archive 10.4 This is how you create a commissioning archive 10.4 This is how you create a commissioning archive Overview Control components can be saved individually or jointly. Creating a separate commissioning archive for each component is recommended, so that the files can be read in again independently of each other.
  • Page 353 Easy Archive 10.4 This is how you create a commissioning archive 4. Choose whether the data classes should be "ignored" or "considered" using the <SELECT> key: – Select "ignored" to archive all data belonging to the control component. – Select "considered" to write only the data in the data classes selected under "Selection" in the archive.

  • Page 354: This Is How You Import A Commissioning Archive

    Easy Archive 10.5 This is how you import a commissioning archive 10.5 This is how you import a commissioning archive Precondition The access level "User" is necessary for reading in an archive. Reading-in a commissioning archive Procedure: 1. Select the "Startup" operating area. 2.

  • Page 355: Example: Data Archiving "Easy Archive" (Use Case)

    Example: Data archiving "Easy Archive" (use case) Easy Archive With "Easy Archive", the SINUMERIK 828D has a fundamentally new procedure for data archiving. This procedure is tailored exactly to the needs of series machine manufacture. "Easy Archive" is based on a strict separation between SINUMERIK system software, adaptation data of the OEM data (machine data, manufacturer cycles) and operator data (part programs, tool offsets).
  • Page 356 SINUMERIK 828D user interface. So no separate PC is needed for the archive. By separating the system data from the adapted and user data, the SINUMERIK 828D system updates can be completely carried out by the OEM, without changes to the adapted data. A system update can be carried out by the end users themselves in a short time.

  • Page 357: Parameterizing The Serial Interface

    Easy Archive 10.7 Parameterizing the serial interface 10.7 Parameterizing the serial interface Data exchange Data exchange via the serial interface is possible from the following operating areas: ● "Program manager" operating area ● "Start-up" operating area → "System data" softkey Press the following softkeys to set the interface parameters: Note If the interface is already assigned, e.g.
  • Page 358 Easy Archive 10.7 Parameterizing the serial interface CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 359: Appendix

    Appendix Table: Language code in file names Supported languages System languages: Language Abbreviation in file name Chinese (simplified) Chinese (traditional) German English Spanish French Italian Korean Portuguese (Brazil) Additional languages: Language Abbreviation in file name Czech Danish Finnish Hungarian Indonesian Japanese Malaysian Dutch...

  • Page 360: List Of Abbreviations

    Appendix A.2 List of abbreviations List of abbreviations Abbreviation Meaning Explanation Active Line Module ASCII American Standard Code for Information Inter‐ American coding standard for the exchange of in‐ change formation AUTO "Automatic" operating mode Mode group Operator Panel Interface BERO Proximity limit switch with feedback oscillator BICO...
  • Page 361 Appendix A.2 List of abbreviations Abbreviation Meaning Explanation Machine Control Panel Machine control panel Machine data "Manual Data Automatic" operating mode Manual input Motor Data Set Motor data set Machine Coordinate System MLFB Machine-Readable Product Code Main Program File Main program (NC part program) MAIN Main program Main program (OB1, PLC)
  • Page 362 Appendix A.2 List of abbreviations Abbreviation Meaning Explanation Tool Management Zero Offset Active Identifier (file type) for work offset data CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 363: Information About Third-Party Software Used

    Appendix A.3 Information about third-party software used Information about third-party software used Copyright 1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc. Printed in the United States of America. All Rights Reserved. This software product (LICENSED PRODUCT), implementing the Object Management Group's "Internet Inter-ORB Protocol", is protected by copyright and is distributed under the following license restricting its use.
  • Page 364 Appendix A.3 Information about third-party software used is or includes a copy or modification of this software and in all copies of the supporting documentation for such software. THIS SOFTWARE IS BEING PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY.

  • Page 365: Index

    Index Log, 55 Structure, 52 " Archive Memory area, 336 "Speed controller" strategy, 173 Automatic servo tuning, 170 Auxiliary axes Configuring, 135 Axis strategy, 171 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE (MD22562), 257, 300 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE (MD22550), 255 $MN_UPLOAD_MD_CHANGES_ONLY Backing up tuning results, 213 (MD11210), 337 Buffer, 255 $MN_USER_DATA_INT (MD14510), 241 $MNS_ACCESS_RESET_SERV_PLANNER...
  • Page 366 Index Motor (MDS), 155 Removing, 163 DB1800, 227, 228 DB9903, 225 Hardware serial number, 51 DB9904, 226 High Speed Cutting (HSC), 81 Definition files, 31 Deleting a language, 42 Dictionary Editing, 43 importing, 43 Infeed Direct connection, 26 Change for the first commissioning, 119 Drive Configuration, 119 BICO interconnection, 107...
  • Page 367 Index MD11210 $MN_UPLOAD_MD_CHANGES_ONLY, 337 MD14510 $MN_USER_DATA_INT[i], 241 Replacement tools, 251 MD22550 Replacing a Motor Module, 126 TOOL_CHANGE_MODE, 255 RTC capacitor, 19 MD22562 TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE, 257, 300 MD51235 ACCESS_RESET_SERV_PLANNER, 236 MD52270 Serial interface, 343 TM_FUNCTION_MASK, 261 Service Planner Measuring in JOG, 311 Configuration mode, 230 Message, asynchronous, 284 Standard mode, 231...
  • Page 368 Index User example, 341 User interface, 263 User views, 78 Deactivate, 343 Interface, 343 Variable Location state, 295 Location type, 295 T number, 296 Wiring rules DRIVE-CLiQ, 141 X122 digital inputs/outputs, 146 X132 digital inputs/outputs, 146 CNC commissioning Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 369 General settings Machine and setting data Connecting drives SINUMERIK Configuring the network SINUMERIK 828D SINUMERIK Operate Customizing the "Machine" operating area Simulation and simultaneous recording Commissioning Manual Configuring cycles Spindle function Tool management Service and diagnostics Appendix Valid for: CNC software Version 4.7 SP2...
  • Page 370 Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems.
  • Page 371 Table of contents General settings............................9 Access levels ..........................9 1.1.1 Definition of access levels......................9 1.1.2 Modifying the access levels password..................9 1.1.3 Access levels for programs....................10 1.1.4 Access rights for files......................13 1.1.5 Access levels for softkeys......................13 1.1.6 This is how you define new access levels for softkeys............14 Set date/time..........................16 Using the time server......................18 Changing the language......................19...
  • Page 372 Table of contents 4.4.3 Ethernet network diagnostics....................44 4.4.3.1 Diagnostics of the network and DHCP server................44 4.4.3.2 Accessible nodes........................45 Customizing the "Machine" operating area....................49 Setting the font size of the actual value display..............49 Inserting a user-specific logo....................49 Configuring the display of the G-code groups................50 Configuring the channel operational message...............51 Deactivating program test......................55 Activating the "Teach In"...
  • Page 373 Table of contents 7.5.2 Setting up cycles for turning....................105 7.5.3 Setting-up ShopTurn cycles for turning................109 7.5.4 Setting up a counterspindle....................111 7.5.5 Setting up the counterspindle under ShopTurn..............113 7.5.6 Technology cycles for turning....................115 7.5.7 Single-channel and two-channel sensors................118 7.5.8 Example: Two-channel turning machine with general axis configuration......120 7.5.9 Cylinder surface transformation (TRACYL)................122 7.5.10...
  • Page 374 Table of contents Spindle diagnostics......................208 8.4.1 Spindle diagnostics......................208 8.4.2 Temperatures........................210 8.4.3 Motor temperature sensor....................212 8.4.4 Additional temperature sensor.....................213 8.4.5 Temperature histograms......................213 8.4.6 Speed/torque........................214 8.4.7 Clamping system........................214 8.4.8 Clamping system: Speed limits....................216 8.4.9 Clamping system: Diagnostic statistics................217 8.4.10 Clamping system: Clamping time statistics................218 8.4.11 Fetching the logistics data....................219 Tool management.............................221...
  • Page 375 Table of contents 9.2.25 Configuring Save to file......................287 Creating OEM texts......................288 9.3.1 Creating OEM texts......................288 9.3.2 Identifiers of the standard texts....................289 9.3.3 Examples of OEM texts......................292 Examples..........................294 9.4.1 Example: Configuring an OEM tool list................294 9.4.1.1 Adapting the configuration file....................294 9.4.1.2 Adaptation of the customer text file..................296 9.4.2 Example: Configuring magazine location types with names..........298...
  • Page 376 Table of contents 10.4.4.1 Selecting attributes of a variable..................351 10.4.4.2 Setting trace views.......................355 10.4.4.3 Selecting a variable......................356 10.4.4.4 Scaling the display.......................356 10.4.4.5 Zooming the display......................357 10.4.4.6 Position the cursor.......................359 10.4.4.7 Acquiring measured values....................359 10.4.5 Trace session files ......................360 10.4.5.1 Creating a session file......................360 10.4.5.2 Saving the trace file......................361 10.4.5.3...

  • Page 377: General Settings

    General settings Access levels 1.1.1 Definition of access levels Access to programs, data and functions is protected in a user-oriented hierarchical system of seven access levels. These are divided into ● Three password levels for manufacturer, service and users ● Four keyswitch positions for users There are access levels 1 to 7 (see table below);...

  • Page 378: Access Levels For Programs

    General settings 1.1 Access levels Setting the password Select the "Start-up" operating area. Press the "Password" softkey. Press the "Set password" softkey. The "Set Password" window opens. Enter one of the possible default passwords and press the "OK" soft‐ key to confirm the entry. A permissible password is set and the valid access level is displayed.
  • Page 379 General settings 1.1 Access levels With access authorization levels to files and directories, it can be defined as to which users are authorized to execute which operations on a directory or a file in a file system. Operations in this sense include: ●...
  • Page 380 Settings in the slfsfileattributes.ini file The slfsfileattributes.ini file is available as a template in the following directory: ../siemens/sinumerik/hmi/template/cfg The values from 0 ... 7 correspond to the access levels that, for example, also apply to the password. The 4-digit numbers designate the sequence according to the following rights:...

  • Page 381: Access Rights For Files

    General settings 1.1 Access levels 1.1.4 Access rights for files Changing access rights Access rights for execution, writing, listing and reading are displayed in the "Properties" window. ● Execute: is used for the selection for execution. ● Write: controls the changing and deletion of a file or a directory. For NC files, you have the option to set the access rights from keyswitch 0 to the current access level, to be set separately for each file.

  • Page 382: This Is How You Define New Access Levels For Softkeys

    General settings 1.1 Access levels Access hierarchy A new access level can only be allocated for those softkeys that are also visible and can be used in the actual access level. Example: If a softkey is only accessible with the "Manufacturer" access level, then the access level cannot be changed by an operator with access level "Key-operated switch setting 3".
  • Page 383 General settings 1.1 Access levels Preconditions Access to the "Customize softkeys" is protected using a general MD51073 $MNS_ACCESS_SET_SOFTKEY_ACCESS. This machine data is pre-assigned access level 3, i.e. the function is available from "Service" password and higher. In order that an operator with "User"...

  • Page 384: Set Date/Time

    General settings 1.2 Set date/time Result When the changes have been accepted, a configuration file with the "slsoftkeyaccess.xml" name is created and is saved in the file system under the following path: ../user/sinumerik/hmi/ cfg. Files can also be saved in the /oem path, which are evaluated when the system boots. The following priority applies: oem <...
  • Page 385 General settings 1.2 Set date/time Time display formats Formats Example Hour system H:m:s AP 1:2:4 PM 24 hour system, with display of "AM" / "PM" h:m:s ap 1:2:8 pm 12 hour system, with display of "am" / "pm" HH:mm:ss AP 13:02:08 PM 24 hour system, with display of "AM"...

  • Page 386: Using The Time Server

    General settings 1.3 Using the time server Using the time server To ensure that the correct time information is always automatically available to the control, you can connect up to three time servers to the operating software. Make your settings in the "Set Date and Time"...

  • Page 387: Changing The Language

    General settings 1.4 Changing the language Press the "Set time server" softkey. If a connection to a time server exists, the settings will be synchronized with the system immediately. After that, a cyclic check is made as to whether the settings are effective. The "Set Date and Time" window re‐ mains open.

  • Page 388: Configuring Caps Lock

    General settings 1.5 Configuring Caps Lock Defining two languages MD9100 $MM_CHANGE_LANGUAGE_MODE Language selection mode Selection of two languages. During operation, the "Change language" softkey can be used to toggle between these languages. Select the "Start-up" operating area. Press the "HMI" softkey. Press the ">>"...

  • Page 389: Inserting A User-Specific Run Up Screen

    General settings 1.7 Creating screenshots Inserting a user-specific run up screen OEM-specific run up screen You can replace the Siemens run up screen by your own run up screen. Procedure: 1. Call your own run up screen "splash.png". Note The file name must not contain any lower case letters.
  • Page 390 General settings 1.7 Creating screenshots Press the "Copy" softkey. - OR - Press the "Cut" softkey. Open the required archive directory, e.g. on a USB flash drive and press the "Paste" softkey. SINUMERIK Operate Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 391: Machine And Setting Data

    Machine and setting data User views Usage In the "User Views" window you can create and adapt all machine data relevant to a particular functionality. Machine data is individually collated to simplify the user's task. You can include additional comments when creating and/or editing user views. Display in the the "Parameter"...

  • Page 392: Creating A User View

    Machine and setting data 2.1 User views 2.1.1 Creating a user view Procedure Select the "Start-up" operating area and press the "Mach. data" softkey. Press the softkeys "User views", "Manage view" and "New view". The "New View" window opens. Enter the desired view name. Press the "OK"...

  • Page 393: Editing The User View

    Machine and setting data 2.1 User views Press the "Back" softkey to close the list box and return to the user view you want to edit. Your entries are automatically stored. Press the "Insert text" softkey to insert any text in the open user view. The "Insert Text"...
  • Page 394 Machine and setting data 2.1 User views Press the "Edit view” softkey. Additional softkeys to edit the user view are listed. Press the "Insert data" softkey if you wish to enter another data item. Select a machine data item with the cursor keys. Press the "Up"...

  • Page 395: Deleting A User View

    Machine and setting data 2.2 Plain texts for machine and setting data 2.1.3 Deleting a user view Procedure Select the "Start-up" operating area. press the "Machine data" softkey. Press the "User views" softkey. Press the "Manage view” softkey. Select the desired view from the selection list. Press the "Delete view"...
  • Page 396 Machine and setting data 2.2 Plain texts for machine and setting data Files File Machine/setting data nctea_xxx.txt General machine/setting data chtea_xxx.txt Channel-specific machine/setting data axtea_xxx.txt Axis-specific machine/setting data hmitea_xxx.txt Display machine data The specified language code must be used for "xxx", e.g. "deu" for German, "eng" for English, etc.
  • Page 397 Machine and setting data 2.2 Plain texts for machine and setting data Result in the display The plain text is displayed in the table or in the diagnostics line in the operating area "Startup", "General MD". Machine data Text 14510 My integer text for PLC_MD 14510 14510[1] My integer text for MD 14510[1]...
  • Page 398 Machine and setting data 2.2 Plain texts for machine and setting data SINUMERIK Operate Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 399: Connecting Drives

    Connecting drives Overview Up to 21 connections to so-called logical drives (data carriers) can be configured. These drives can be accessed in the "Program manager" and "Startup" operating areas. The following logical drives can be set up: ● USB interface ●...

  • Page 400: Setting The Ees

    Connecting drives 3.4 Setting the EES Activating the function Processing EXTCALL calls is switched-on or switched-off using the following display machine data. MD9106 $MM_SERVE_EXTCALL_PROGRAMS HMI ignores EXTCALL instructions and selection via PLC HMI processes EXTCALL instructions and selection via PLC (default value) HMI processes EXTCALL instructions and ignores selection via PLC HMI ignores EXTCALL instructions and processes selection via PLC Note...

  • Page 401: Creating A Global Part Program Memory

    Connecting drives 3.6 Program selection References Function Manual Basic Functions; Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Chapter "EES (Execution from External Storage)" Creating a global part program memory With the global part program memory (GDIR), a structure is provided analog to the passive file system of the NC.
  • Page 402 Connecting drives 3.6 Program selection Configuring a softkey MD51041 $MNS_ENABLE_PROGLIST_USER No softkey The "Prog. list" softkey is displayed MD51043 $MNS_ENABLE_PROGLIST_MANUFACT No softkey The "MANUFACTURER" softkey is displayed Precondition To create program lists, you require the following authorization: ● "Program manager" operating area: Access level 3 (password: User) or ●...
  • Page 403 Connecting drives 3.6 Program selection Place the cursor in the desired line (program number). Press the "Select program" softkey. The "Programs" window opens. The data tree of the NC memory with the directories "Workpieces", "Part programs" and "Subprograms" is dis‐ played.
  • Page 404 Connecting drives 3.6 Program selection SINUMERIK Operate Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 405: Configuring The Network

    Configuring the network Displaying the network overview All the available network interfaces and their settings are listed in the "Overview of the Network Settings" window. For example, the IP addresses, subnet masks and MAC addresses for the company network are displayed here and can be processed. Procedure Select the "Start-up"...

  • Page 406: Settings Of The Factory Network

    Configuring the network 4.2 Settings of the factory network Settings of the factory network The configuration for the network interface, active protocols and firewall exceptions of the company network are performed in the Settings of the Company Network window. Setting Description Gateway If this value is not empty, the host specified there...

  • Page 407: Saving Network Settings

    Configuring the network 4.3 Saving network settings NOTICE Security risk Note that opening the ports in the firewall can represent a security risk. Only enable the ports that you actually require. Note that every accessible service can have security gaps. Procedure The network overview is open.

  • Page 408: Station-Related Network Diagnostics

    Station-related network diagnostics With the aid of the station-related network diagnostics, you can find and examine faulty, incorrectly parameterized or unconnected network and bus interfaces. The network/bus interfaces of the SINUMERIK 828D are: ● Company network (X130) ● Service (X127) ●...

  • Page 409: Tcp/Ip Diagnostics And Configuration

    Configuring the network 4.4 Station-related network diagnostics Press the "Details" softkey to hide the detailed display. Press the "Return" softkey in order to exit the "TCP/IP Diagnostics" win‐ dow and return to the "PROFINET/PROFIBUS Diagnostics" window. 4.4.2 TCP/IP diagnostics and configuration The configuration of the network interfaces is displayed in the "TCP/IP Configuration"...
  • Page 410 Configuring the network 4.4 Station-related network diagnostics ● Address type Information about the configuration of the network adapter in the configuration file "basesys.ini": – DHCP: DHCP is active for this network adapter. The information behind the hyphen "-" specifies the DHCP mode of operation: Off - DHCP is deactivated for this adapter Client - a DHCP client that receives an IP address and further data from a server, is running on the interface...
  • Page 411 Configuring the network 4.4 Station-related network diagnostics Modifiable parameters The following parameters of the company network interface (X130) can be set: ● Address type ● IP address ● Subnet mask ● DNS server 1 and 2 ● Gateway (applies for service interface and company network) Address types ●...

  • Page 412: Ethernet Network Diagnostics

    Configuring the network 4.4 Station-related network diagnostics 4.4.3 Ethernet network diagnostics 4.4.3.1 Diagnostics of the network and DHCP server Press the "Network diagnostics" softkey to display data and availability of the network nodes. As result, the diagnostics provide, among other things, the following information: ●...

  • Page 413: Accessible Nodes

    Configuring the network 4.4 Station-related network diagnostics 4.4.3.2 Accessible nodes Pressing the "Accessible nodes" softkey creates and displays the list of nodes accessible via PROFINET. The list content can be compared as current topology with a reference topology. Note Although handheld terminals are not determined for the list of accessible nodes, they can be added as additional nodes to the topology.
  • Page 414 Configuring the network 4.4 Station-related network diagnostics Additional nodes Press the "Additional nodes" softkey to search for nodes that are not listed under "Accessible nodes". The "Search for Additional Nodes" window opens. If necessary, change the address range and confirm with "OK". The found nodes are appended in the table;...
  • Page 415 Configuring the network 4.4 Station-related network diagnostics Default storage locations: ● Current topology (.xml or .csv): The following storage locations are offered depending on the configuration: – Network topology (storage location: HMI data / data backups / network topology) – User CF –...
  • Page 416 Configuring the network 4.4 Station-related network diagnostics SINUMERIK Operate Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 417: Customizing The "Machine" Operating Area

    Number of actual values with a large font Number of actual values with a larger font (default setting) Inserting a user-specific logo OEM-specific logo The Siemens logo is visible in the header of the "Machine" operating area. SINUMERIK Operate Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 418: Configuring The Display Of The G-Code Groups

    Configuring G-code groups Section Meaning Selected G groups This area is intended for operation of the controller in Siemens mode. Selected G groups ISO This area is intended for operation of the controller in ISO mode. mode Enter the G-code group and position as follows: SelectedGGroupN = M Position where G-code group M will be displayed.

  • Page 419: Configuring The Channel Operational Message

    As soon as the file is located in the user-specific directory, the entries for this file take precedence over the Siemens file. If an entry is missing in a user-specific file, the corresponding entry from the Siemens file is used instead.
  • Page 420 ● If the channel operational message is to be displayed immediately, "0" must be specified as time. Procedure 1. Copy the "slmahdconfig.ini" file from the /siemens/sinumerik/hmi/template/cfg directory. 2. Place the file in the following directory: /oem/sinumerik/hmi/cfg or /user/sinumerik/hmi/cfg. 3. Open the file and make the required settings.
  • Page 421 Customizing the "Machine" operating area 5.4 Configuring the channel operational message 14 = condwait.png ; Waiting for positioning axis 15 = condwait.png ; Waiting for spindle 15 = condwait.png ; Waiting for other channel 17 = condstop.png ; Waiting for feedrate override 18 = condstop.png ;...
  • Page 422 Customizing the "Machine" operating area 5.4 Configuring the channel operational message 56 = condwait.png ; Axis replacement: Axis is oscillating axis 57 = condwait.png ; Axis replacement: Axis is Jog axis 58 = condwait.png ; Axis replacement: Command axis 58 = condwait.png ;...

  • Page 423: Deactivating Program Test

    Customizing the "Machine" operating area 5.6 Activating the "Teach In" function 9 = 0 ; Feed enable missing 10 = 0 ; Dwell time active 12 = 0 ; Axis enable missing 16 = 0 ; Waiting for other channel 17 = 0 ;...
  • Page 424 Customizing the "Machine" operating area 5.6 Activating the "Teach In" function Settings MD51034 $MNS_TEACH_MODE Bit 0 = 1 The "Teach progr." softkey is displayed. The approached position is accepted into the program with the "Accept" softkey, default value. Bit 1 = 1 The acceptance of the teach-in block can be blocked by the PLC.

  • Page 425: Block Search

    Customizing the "Machine" operating area 5.7 Block search MD51033 $MNS_TU_DISPLAY_BASE Number base, display of the rotary axes TU posi‐ tion Binary display, position of the rotary axes TU (standard) The following machine data have a similar effect, but it is channel-specific effect in this case: MD52032 $MCS_STAT_DISPLAY_BASE Number base for display of the joint position STAT Value from MD51032 effective...

  • Page 426: Accelerated Block Search For Execution From External

    Customizing the "Machine" operating area 5.7 Block search The following machine data can be used to set the possible variants for the block search in a JobShop program (ShopMill, ShopTurn): MD51024 $MNS_BLOCK_SEARCH_MODE_MASK_JS Bit mask for the available search modes (ShopMill, ShopTurn, single-channel) Bit 0 = 1 Block search with calculation, without approach (default setting) Bit 1 = 1...

  • Page 427: Manual Machine

    Customizing the "Machine" operating area 5.8 Manual machine Manual machine General information "Manual machine" allows you to work with large cycles in manual mode without having to write programs especially for this purpose. Software option You require the following software option in order to use this function: "ShopMill/ShopTurn"...
  • Page 428 Customizing the "Machine" operating area 5.8 Manual machine SD43200 $SA_SPIND_S Speed for spindle start using NC/PLC interface signal; value outputs using the operating software SD43202 $SA_SPIND_CONSTCUT_S Cutting speed for spindle start using NC/PLC interface signal; value outputs using the operating software SD43206 $SA_SPIND_SPEED_TYPE Spindle speed pipe for spindle start us‐...

  • Page 429: Multi-Channel Support

    Customizing the "Machine" operating area 5.9 Multi-channel support Feedrate SD42600 $SC_JOG_FEED_PER_REV_SOURCE = -3 Revolutional feedrate control in JOG mode SD43300 $SA_ASSIGN_FEED_PER_REV_SOURCE [X ax‐ Revolutional feedrate for positioning is] = -3 axis X SD43300 $SA_ASSIGN_FEED_PER_REV_SOURCE [Z ax‐ Revolutional feedrate for positioning is] = -3 axis Z Note...
  • Page 430 Customizing the "Machine" operating area 5.9 Multi-channel support Requirement ● For multi-channel machine, the following data must be the same for all channels: – Measurement unit – Zero offset (e.g. G54) – Z value of the zero offset (optional) – Blank –...

  • Page 431: Configuring The Offset Display

    Customizing the "Machine" operating area 5.11 Activate machining time recording 5.10 Configuring the offset display Configuring the screen display The screen display for offset can be configured using the following channel-specific machine data: MD52210 $MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_DISP Function screen display Bit 14 Display DRF offset under Machine Bit 15 Display tool offset ($AA_TOFF) under Machine...
  • Page 432 Customizing the "Machine" operating area 5.11 Activate machining time recording Note Machine data MD18370, MD18371, and MD28302 are still valid for machining time recording when they are assigned higher values. SINUMERIK Operate Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 433: Simulation And Simultaneous Recording

    Simulation and simultaneous recording Simulation overview Software option You require the "3D simulation 1 (finished part)" option for the 3D representation of the simulation. Simulation is supported with its own program interpreter (SNCK) and a separate simulation- data environment in SINUMERIK Operate. The SNCK considers the complete syntax of the SINUMERIK control family, including the possibility of incorporating special user options on the machine by comparing data with the NC environment.
  • Page 434 It can then only be started from another channel using the part program command "START". This function is not available for the SINUMERIK 828D. ● Alarm display in the simulation: Alarms are output in the simulation exactly the same way as alarms in the normal program execution, but no more than five alarms are displayed (above the graphic, to distinguish them from the machine alarms).

  • Page 435: Setting The Technology For Simulation

    Simulation and simultaneous recording 6.2 Setting the technology for simulation Setting the technology for simulation Turning technology Examples of machine kinematics: ● Conventional turning with two geometry axes ● Three spindles: Main spindle, counterspindle, tool spindle ● Counterspindle slides, tailstock as NC axis ●...
  • Page 436 Bit 3 Reversal of direction of rotation (for rotary axes) The MD52290 $MCS_SIM_DISPLAY_CONFIG machine data acts only on the OP019. It has no significance for SINUMERIK 828D. MD52290 $MCS_SIM_DISPLAY_CONFIG Position of the status display of the channel in the simulation.

  • Page 437: Simultaneous Recording Overview

    Simulation and simultaneous recording 6.3 Simultaneous recording overview Simultaneous recording overview Software option You require the option "Simultaneous recording (real-time simulation)" for the "Simultaneous recording" function. Software option You require the "ShopMill/ShopTurn" option to display the tailstock Software option You require the "3D simulation 1 (finished part)" option for the 3D representation of the simultaneous recording function.

  • Page 438: Clamping A Blank

    Simulation and simultaneous recording 6.4 Clamping a blank Example: Activating the tailstock representation in the spindle chuck data Procedure: 1. Make the tailstock visible by making the selection in the program. 2. Specify the tailstock dimensions: Select in the operating area "Parameters" → "Setting data" → "Spindle chuck data", and enter the "ZR"...
  • Page 439 Simulation and simultaneous recording 6.4 Clamping a blank Requirements ● The machine has several clamping options available for selection. ● The machine has a clamping option that does not point in the Z direction as standard (e.g. a boring mill). Under the following circumstances, you can specify the position and orientation of the rotary axes in the machine data MD53220 and MD52207: ●...
  • Page 440 Simulation and simultaneous recording 6.4 Clamping a blank Function options In the program header, a blank can be optionally set to A, B, C and table clamping: Clamping View Machine data A axis MD52207 $MCS_USAGE_ATTRIB bit 0 and bit 8 = 1 B axis MD52207 $MCS_USAGE_ATTRIB bit 1 and bit 8 = 1 C axis...
  • Page 441 Simulation and simultaneous recording 6.4 Clamping a blank Example for the machine configuration Example for a machine configuration when the A axis should rotate at the X axis: MD20080 $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB[n] Channel axis name in channel [n] Spindle MD52207 $MCS_USAGE_ATTRIB[4] Attribute of rotary axis A in channel 4 = 181H Bit 0 = 1 Rotation around the 1st geometry axis (for rotary axes)
  • Page 442 Simulation and simultaneous recording 6.4 Clamping a blank SINUMERIK Operate Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 443: Configuring Cycles

    Configuring cycles Activating turning/milling/drilling/grinding technologies The cycles are automatically loaded when the control boots (Power On). The configuration is realized using cycle machine data and cycle setting data. In so doing, a differentiation is made between the following data: ● General cycle machine data ●...
  • Page 444 Configuring cycles 7.1 Activating turning/milling/drilling/grinding technologies Note Cylindrical and surface grinding are not supported as a technology extension by SINUMERIK Operate. References: grinding For further information about the grinding technology, please refer to: ● Chapter "grinding (Page 133)" ● Operating Manual, Grinding ●...

  • Page 445: 7.1 Activating Turning/Milling/Drilling/Grinding Technologies

    Configuring cycles 7.1 Activating turning/milling/drilling/grinding technologies Meaning of the axes MD52206 $MCS_AXIS_USAGE[n] Meaning of the axes in the channel [n] channel axis number No special meaning Tool spindle (rotating tool) Auxiliary spindle (rotating tool) Main spindle (turning) Separate C axis of the main spindle (turning) SINUMERIK Operate Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 446 Configuring cycles 7.1 Activating turning/milling/drilling/grinding technologies Counterspindle (turning) Separate C axis of the counterspindle (turning) Linear axis of the counterspindle (turning) Tailstock (turning) Steady (turning) = 10 B axis (turning) = 12 B axis in counterspindle (turning) = 13 Transverse travel X of the counterspindle (turning) Defining the direction of rotation Enter the direction of rotation for the rotary axes that are not configured in a tool holder or a 5- axis transformation via the following channel-specific machine data.

  • Page 447: Technology Cycles For Drilling

    Configuring cycles 7.2 Technology cycles for drilling = 18 G18 plane (permanently set) = 19 G19 plane MD52212 $MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_TECH Cross-technology function screen Bit 0 Enable swivel with tool holder = 0 Swivel plane, swivel tool not enabled = 1 Swivel plane, swivel tool enabled Bit 1 Optimized travel along software limit switches = 0 No optimized travel along software limit switches...
  • Page 448 Configuring cycles 7.2 Technology cycles for drilling Bit 2 Boring CYCLE86: When positioning the spindle, take into account swiveled table kinematics (tool carrier) = 0 When positioning the spindle, do not take into account the components of the swiveled table kinematics (swiveling with CYCLE800, tool carrier).

  • Page 449: Manufacturer Cycles

    Configuring cycles 7.3 Manufacturer cycles SD55483 $SCS_DRILL_TAPPING_SET_GG24[0] Setting tapping G group 24: Precontrol Precontrol, the same as before the cycle call (default value). FFWON FFWOF Tapping (CYCLE84) SD55484 $SCS_DRILL_TAPPING_SET_MC[0] Spindle operation for MCALL For MCALL, reactivate spindle operation (default value). For MCALL, remain in position controlled spindle operation.

  • Page 450: Prog_Event.spf Standard Cycle

    Configuring cycles 7.3 Manufacturer cycles Copying manufacturer cycles Copy the cycle from the NC data/Cycles/Standard cycles directory to the NC data/Cycles/User cycles directory before making any changes. Changes for the cycle take effect only in this directory. Select the "Start-up" operating area. Press the "System data"...

  • Page 451: Manufacturer Cycle For Tool Change Cust_T And Cust_M6

    Configuring cycles 7.3 Manufacturer cycles Note If $P_PROG_EVENT==5 is used in the CYCPE_MA.SPF, no REPOSA may be programmed as this is already present in the PROG_EVENT.SPF, otherwise an error occurs for SSL with calculation. 7.3.3 Manufacturer cycle for tool change CUST_T and CUST_M6 Function The two cycles are used to track the T preparation (CUST_T) and the tool change (CUST_M6) according to SERUPRO.

  • Page 452: Cust_Techcyc.spf Manufacturer Cycle

    Configuring cycles 7.3 Manufacturer cycles T replacement cycle If a T replacement cycle is being used, then the following note must be observed: Note The CUST_T cycle uses the language command TCA (ToolChangeAbsolut) for the T call and therefore also has the possibility of inserting tools that have been disabled. The language command TCA is reconfigured to _TCA for 828D.
  • Page 453 Configuring cycles 7.3 Manufacturer cycles Adapt manufacturer cycle CUST_TECHCYC.SPF You can execute the following actions with the aid of the _MODE parameter: Marker Action Main spindle: Changeover to C axis mode Changeover to spindle mode Clamp C axis Release C axis clamping Rinse chuck Close chuck Open chuck when spindle is stationary...
  • Page 454 Configuring cycles 7.3 Manufacturer cycles Marker Action _M100 Drawer: Position before cut-off _M101 Open during cut-off _M102 Close after cut-off _M103 Cut-off completed _M110 Tool change _M111 After end of tool change cycle (with tool change) _M112 Before tool change on retraction plane _M113 Before cutting edge reselection _M114...

  • Page 455: Cust_Multichan User Cycle

    Configuring cycles 7.3 Manufacturer cycles Marker Action _M231 Start of program (ShopMill program) _M232 End of program header (ShopMill program) _M235 End of program loop (ShopMill program) _M236 End of program (ShopMill program) _M300 Boring CYCLE86 Adapt the spindle to the tool position (SD55216 $SCS_FUNCTION_MASK_DRILL_SET bit 6 = 1) 7.3.5 CUST_MULTICHAN user cycle...
  • Page 456 Configuring cycles 7.3 Manufacturer cycles References Basic Functions Function Manual ● Chapter "H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC > "Auxiliary functions" ● Chapter "K1: Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response" > "Block search" ● Chapter "K2: Axes, coordinate systems, frames" > "Frames" Setting the multi-channel view In automatic operation, select under "Settings"...
  • Page 457 Configuring cycles 7.3 Manufacturer cycles Normally, assign the following frames for a zero offset: MD10616 $MN_MAPPED_FRAME_MASK Frame mapping release Bit 0 = 1 System frame for actual value setting and scratching ($P_SETFR) Bit 12 = 1 Channel-specific base frames ($P_CHBFR) Bit 13 = 1 Set frames, zero offsets ($P_UIFR) With the following machine data, specify the connection of the axes that should have the same...
  • Page 458 Note An example for commissioning the positioning function is also supplied in the SINUMERIK 828D Toolbox. All required M-commands must be grouped. Some groups are predefined for the standard M- commands (e.g. M3, M4, M5, ...), see following machine data item: MD22040 $MC_AUXFU_PREDEF_GROUP Group assignment of predefined auxiliary functions.
  • Page 459 Configuring cycles 7.3 Manufacturer cycles You must define user-defined M-commands in the following machine data item: MD22000 $MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_GROUP Auxiliary function group Bits 9, 10, 11 and 15 have a defined meaning in the following machine data: MD22035 $MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_SPEC Specification of the output behavior for the user-de‐ fined auxiliary functions.
  • Page 460 Configuring cycles 7.3 Manufacturer cycles Block search with SERUPRO To perform a fast block search, you must specify the following values: MD22600 $MC_SERUPRO_SPEED_MODE Velocity for block search type 5 Program test with block search / dry run velocity: MD22601 $MC_SERUPRO_SPEED_FACTOR Velocity factor for block search type 5 = 10000 Factor which is multiplied by the dry run feedrate.
  • Page 461 Configuring cycles 7.3 Manufacturer cycles Bit 3 = 0 Skip EXTCALL programs Bit 4 = 1 Block search without calculation (only programGUIDE) Bit 5 = 1 Block search with dry run Block search: Position clamped axes At the end of the PROGEVENT cycle, all axes are positioned automatically with REPOSA. Consequently, for clamped axes, the clamping must be opened automatically via the PLC or the axes must positioned by the machine manufacturer previously in the CYCPE_MA cycle.
  • Page 462 Configuring cycles 7.3 Manufacturer cycles Tool list The tool positions are displayed in accordance with the associated channel in the tool list. If only one TOA is available, non-loaded tools are always displayed in the coordinate system of the first channel. Main spindle and counterspindle You must assign the spindles identically in both channels.

  • Page 463: Milling

    Configuring cycles 7.4 Milling Milling 7.4.1 General All settings for machine and setting data of the standard cycles are also applicable for milling under ShopMill and turning under ShopTurn. 7.4.2 Technology cycles for milling Milling function screen SD52214 $SCS_function_MASK_MILL Milling function screen Bit 0 Enable cylinder surface transformation (ShopMill) Bit 1...

  • Page 464: Setting-Up Shopmill Cycles For Milling

    = 10000 7.4.3 Setting-up ShopMill cycles for milling Load ShopMill cycles for milling When the control boots, the ShopMill cycles are automatically loaded into the following directory: ../siemens/sinumerik/cycles/sm/prog Setting the coordinate system MD52000 $MCS_DISP_COORDINATE_SYSTEM Position of the coordinate system Examples:...
  • Page 465 Configuring cycles 7.4 Milling For plane selection when milling, appropriately set the following machine data: MD52005 $MCS_DISP_PLANE_MILL Plane selection for milling = 17 In the cycle support = 17 G17 (default value) = 18 = 19 Simulation and simultaneous recording In order that simulation and simultaneous recording are displayed without any errors, set the machine data as described in the following section: Setting the technology for simulation (Page 67)
  • Page 466 Configuring cycles 7.4 Milling MD52230 $MCS_M_CODE_ALL_COOLANTS_OFF M code for all coolants Off You define the M function to switch off the coolant that is output when the tool is changed. MD52231 $MCS_M_CODE_COOLANT_1_ON M code for coolant 1 On You define the M function for coolant 1 that is output when the tool is changed. MD52232 $MCS_M_CODE_COOLANT_2_ON M code for coolant 2 On You define the M function for coolant 2 that is output when the tool is changed.

  • Page 467: Cylinder Surface Transformation (Tracyl)

    Configuring cycles 7.4 Milling 7.4.4 Cylinder surface transformation (TRACYL) Software option You require the following software option in order to use this function: "Transmit and peripheral surface transformation". Precondition ● There must be at least one rotary axis at the machine. ●...

  • Page 468: Example: Milling Machine With General Axis Configuration And Tracyl

    Configuring cycles 7.4 Milling 7.4.5 Example: Milling machine with general axis configuration and TRACYL Example of a general axis configuration and activation of TRACYL on the following machine: Axis configuration For the machine shown with rotary axis A and C, you must configure the following machine data: MD10000 $MN_AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB[ ] Machine axis name...
  • Page 469 Configuring cycles 7.4 Milling MD20050 $MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB[ ] Assignment of geometry axis to chan‐ nel axis [0] = 1 X is channel axis 1 if TRACYL is not active [1] = 2 Y is channel axis 2 if TRACYL is not active [2] = 3 Z is channel axis 3 if TRACYL is not active MD20060 $MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB[ ]...
  • Page 470 Configuring cycles 7.4 Milling MD24220 $MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_2[ ] Assignment of geometry axes to channel axes for transformation 2 [0] = 6 6th channel axis becomes GEOAX X with TRACYL [1] = 2 2nd channel axis becomes GEOAX X with TRACYL [2] = 3 3rd channel axis becomes GEOAX X with TRACYL MD24850 $MC_TRACYL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_2 Offset of the rotary axis for the 2nd TRAC‐...

  • Page 471: Shopmill Cycles For Multiple Clamping

    Configuring cycles 7.4 Milling Program code Comment N150 TRAFOOF ;deselection of transformation N160 G0 X0 Y-20 Z115 ;positioning of retract movement ;spindle STOP CYCLE800(0,"TABLE", ;turn A axis back 100000,57,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,-1,100,1) N170 M30 ;end of program 7.4.6 ShopMill cycles for multiple clamping Software options You require the following software option in order to use this function: "ShopMill/ ShopTurn"...
  • Page 472 Configuring cycles 7.4 Milling Figure 7-4 Rotating clamping device (reversible clamping device) The cycle CLAMP.SPF must be adapted as follows: DEF INT _NV ; Auxiliary variable ;–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– ;Adaptation IF _ACT==1 G0 A=DC(0) ENDIF IF _ACT==2 G0 A=DC(90) ENDIF IF _ACT==3 G0 A=DC(180) ENDIF IF _ACT==4...

  • Page 473: Turning

    Configuring cycles 7.5 Turning ENDIF ;–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– _NV=_NPV+_ACT ; Calculate current zero offset N10 G[8]=_NV ; There must not be a calculation here Turning 7.5.1 General All settings for machine and setting data of the standard cycles are also applicable for milling under ShopMill and turning under ShopTurn.
  • Page 474 Configuring cycles 7.5 Turning Bit 4 Enable spindle control of the counterspindle control via user interface Bit 5 Enable spindle control of the tool spindle via user interface Bit 6 Enable balance cutting for two-channel stock removal Bit 7 Retraction when cutting along the contour with G1 Bit 8 Enter the spindle chuck data in the program Bit 9...
  • Page 475 Configuring cycles 7.5 Turning As a result, the following setting options are obtained for the main spindle: Main spindle direction of rotation 52207[n] 52207[n] 52207[n] DB38xx bit 3 = bit 4 = *) bit 5 = DBX2001.6 Note MD52207[n] bit 4 = *) Bit 4 can be set from the operator's view (values as specified) or according to DIN ("0"...
  • Page 476 Configuring cycles 7.5 Turning Stop dimensions Jaw dimensions MD53241 $MAS_SPINDLE_CHUCK_TYPE[ ] Spindle jaw type Clamping, outer Clamping, inner Additional settings The M code, e.g. M34 or M1 = 34 for the spindle chuck is defined in the following machine data. The manufacturer cycle CUST_TECHCYC.SPF also takes the M functions from the following machine data: MD52250 $MCS_M_CODE_CHUCK_OPEN[ ] M code for open chuck with station‐...

  • Page 477: Setting-Up Shopturn Cycles For Turning

    Configuring cycles 7.5 Turning Rounding the contour SD55582 $SCS_TURN_CONT_TRACE_ANGLE Contour turning: Minimum angle for rounding on the contour Specifies the angle between the cutting edge and contour, above which for contour turning, the contour is rounded in order to remove residual material (default value). 7.5.3 Setting-up ShopTurn cycles for turning MD52210 $MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_DISP...
  • Page 478 Configuring cycles 7.5 Turning MD52216 $MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_DRILL Drilling function screen form Bit 3 Constant cutting speed referred to the diameter of the centering = 0 Constant cutting speed referred to the diameter of the tool = 1 Constant cutting speed referred to the diameter of the centering MD52218 $MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_TURN Turning function screen Bit 2...

  • Page 479: Setting Up A Counterspindle

    Configuring cycles 7.5 Turning SD55506 $SCS_TURN_ROUGH_I_RELEASE_DIST Retraction distance for stock remov‐ al during internal machining = 0.5 Specifies the distance, by which the tool is retracted from the contour when removing stock from an internal corner. This does not apply to stock removal at a contour (default value). = -1 The distance is internally defined.
  • Page 480 Configuring cycles 7.5 Turning Defining the direction of rotation You set the directions of rotation for the user interface in the following machine data: MD52207 $MCS_AXIS_USAGE_ATTRIB[n] Attributes of the axes in the channel [n] channel axis number Bit 3 Displayed positive direction of rotation is counter-clockwise (for rotary axes) The view must be from the inside of the machine (operator's view) to the axis of rotation.

  • Page 481: Setting Up The Counterspindle Under Shopturn

    Configuring cycles 7.5 Turning Note MD52207[n] bit 4 = *) Bit 4 can be set from the operator's view (values as specified) or according to DIN ("0" and "1" are then interchanged). The display must be the same for the main spindle and the counterspindle ("from operator's view"...
  • Page 482 Configuring cycles 7.5 Turning Between traveling to the fixed stop and gripping, the counterspindle can retract a short distance to counteract compressive stress in the workpiece. SD55553 $SCS_TURN_FIXED_STOP_RETRACTION Retraction distance before clamping af‐ ter fixed stop. After gripping you can cut off the workpiece. Before doing so, the counterspindle can retract a short distance with the workpiece to exert tensile stress on the workpiece.

  • Page 483: Technology Cycles For Turning

    Configuring cycles 7.5 Turning 7.5.6 Technology cycles for turning Thread-cutting (CYCLE99) To correctly machine the thread, it is necessary to set the machine data MD52207 $MCS_AXIS_USAGE_ATTRIB[n] with bit 3, see Chapter: Setting up a counterspindle (Page 111). Contour groovingCYCLE930, contour turning CYCLE950, stock removal at corner CYCLE951, contour turning CYCLE952 SD55500 $SCS_TURN_FIN_FEED_PERCENT Enter the finishing feedrate for complete ma‐...
  • Page 484 Configuring cycles 7.5 Turning SD55582 $SCS_TURN_CONT_TRACE_ANGLE The angle between cutting edge and con‐ tour as of which rounding is performed on the contour during contour turning in order to remove residual material. If the angle of the residual material is greater than that specified in the setting data, the tool will round the contour.
  • Page 485 Configuring cycles 7.5 Turning SD55586 $SCS_TURN_CONT_INTER_RETRACTION Retraction distance for contour turning for feedrate interruption. This also applies to stock removal, grooving and plunge turning. = > 0 Retraction distance at feed interruption SD55585 $SCS_TURN_CONT_INTERRUPT_TIME has no effect. No retraction distance SD55587 $SCS_TURN_CONT_MIN_REST_MAT_AX1 Limit value during contour turning for removal of residual material in the di‐...

  • Page 486: Single-Channel And Two-Channel Sensors

    Configuring cycles 7.5 Turning Distance to the last cut, SD55595 Retraction between plunge-cutting and stock removal, SD55596 As the tool bends during plunge turning, the tool would make an excessively deep cut during stock removal. The retraction distance of the tool between plunge-cutting and stock removal is specified in the following channel-specific cycle setting data: SD55596 $SCS_TURN_CONT_TURN_RETRACTION Retraction depth before turning...
  • Page 487 Configuring cycles 7.5 Turning Single-channel turning machine with X1 and Z1 axis, main spindle and tool spindle, servo revolver (system 828D-TE42) MD20080 $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB[ ] Channel axis name in the channel [0] = X1 Channel axis X1 [1] = Z1 Channel axis Z1 [2] = C1 Main spindle C1 [3] = SP1...

  • Page 488: Example: Two-Channel Turning Machine With General Axis Configuration

    Configuring cycles 7.5 Turning [6] = C2 Counterspindle C2 [7] = X2 Channel axis X2 [8] = Z2 Channel axis Z2 MD20080 $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB[ ] Channel axis name in channel 2 [0] = X2 Channel axis X2 [1] = Z2 Channel axis Z2 [2] = SP2 Tool spindle SP2 [3] = Z3...
  • Page 489 Configuring cycles 7.5 Turning [7] = MX2 X2 axis in second channel [8] = MZ2 Z2 axis in second channel [9] = MSP2 Tool spindle SP2 MD20050 $MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB[ ] Assignment of geometry axis to chan‐ nel axis for channel 1 [0] = 1 [1] = 0 [2] = 3...

  • Page 490: Cylinder Surface Transformation (Tracyl)

    Configuring cycles 7.5 Turning [3] = 7 Linear axis of the counterspindle [4] = 3 Main spindle [5] = 5 Counterspindle 7.5.9 Cylinder surface transformation (TRACYL) Software option You require the following software option in order to use this function: "Transmit and peripheral surface transformation"...
  • Page 491 Configuring cycles 7.5 Turning MD24400 $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_4 Cylinder surface transformation, counter‐ spindle: Transformation 4 = 512 without groove wall correction (without Y1 axis) = 513 with groove wall correction (with Y1 axis) with groove wall correction and Y1 correction = 514 Note You must also set up other machine data for each of the individual transformations.
  • Page 492 Configuring cycles 7.5 Turning MD24800 $MC_TRACYL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1 Offset of the rotary axis for the 1st TRACYL transformation. MD24805 $MC_TRACYL_ROT_AX_FRAME_1 Axial offset of the rotary axis is taken into account during TRACYL. MD24810 $MC_TRACYL_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1 Sign of the rotary axis for the 1st TRACYL transformation MD24820 $MC_TRACYL_BASE_TOOL_1[ ] Vector of the base tool for the 1st TRACYL...

  • Page 493: End Face Machining (Transmit)

    Configuring cycles 7.5 Turning MD24805 $MC_TRACYL_ROT_AX_FRAME_1 Axial offset of the rotary axis is taken into account during TRACYL. MD24810 $MC_TRACYL_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1 Sign of the rotary axis for the 1st TRACYL transformation MD24820 $MC_TRACYL_BASE_TOOL_1[ ] Vector of the base tool for the 1st TRACYL transformation.
  • Page 494 Configuring cycles 7.5 Turning MD24110 $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1[ ] Axis assignment for the 1st transforma‐ tion in the channel [0] = 1 Perpendicular to the rotary axis X1 [1] = 3 Rotary axis (main spindle) C1 [2] = 2 Parallel to the rotary axis Z1 MD24120 $MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1[ ] Assignment of the geometry axes to chan‐...
  • Page 495 Configuring cycles 7.5 Turning [1] = 3 Rotary axis C1 [2] = 2 Parallel to the rotary axis Z1 MD24120 $MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1[ ] Assignment of the geometry axes to chan‐ nel axes for transformation 1. [0] = 1 1st channel axis X1 [1] = 3 2nd channel axis Y1 [2] = 2...

  • Page 496: Inclined Y Axis (Traang)

    Configuring cycles 7.5 Turning Note The face end machining is automatically integrated in the cycles, with the exception of the straight line and circle. You can select the functions for these two cycles in the "Program" operating area at "Straight line"...
  • Page 497 Configuring cycles 7.5 Turning Example You must configure the following machine data, for example, for a turning machine with X1, Z1 and Y1 axis as well as a main spindle (C1) and a tool spindle (SP1): MD20050 $MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB[ ] Assignment of geometry axis to channel axis.
  • Page 498 Configuring cycles 7.5 Turning MD24432 $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_5[ ] Axis assignment for transformation 5. [0] = 5 1st transformer axis = channel axis, Y1 [1] = 1 2nd transformer axis = channel axis, X1 [2] = 2 3rd transformer axis = channel axis, Z1 MD24434 $MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_5[ ] Assignment of geometry axes to channel axes for transformation 5.

  • Page 499: Zero Point Not At The Rotation Center

    Configuring cycles 7.5 Turning MD24454 $MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_7[ ] Assignment of geometry axes to channel axes for transformation 7. [0] = 1 1st axis = channel axis X1 [1] = 3 2nd axis = channel axis Y1 [2] = 2 3rd axis = channel axis Z1 MD24996 $MC_TRACON_CHAIN_2[ ] Transformation linking [0] = 3...

  • Page 500: Spindle Speed Limitation For Current Program

    Configuring cycles 7.5 Turning MD24920 $MC_TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_1 [0] Vector of the base tool for the 1st TRANSMIT transformation. = - 600 Value in mm If necessary, enter the same for further transformations (TRANSMIT, TRACYL). Note also the following machine data: MD20360 $MC_TOOL_PARAMETER_DEF_MASK Definition of the effect of the tool parameters.

  • Page 501: Grinding

    Configuring cycles 7.6 grinding Changing spindle speed limits for the current program only REDEF $SA_SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMS PRLOC ; maximum spindle speed limit for V constant (G96) REDEF $SA_SPIND_MAX_VELO_G26 PRLOC ; maximum spindle speed limit for rpm (G26) grinding General Grinding tools are identified by tool type 400, 410; dressing tools are identified by tool type 490.
  • Page 502 Configuring cycles 7.6 grinding ● CYCLE4077: Surface grinding, plunge grinding with measurement control ● CYCLE4078: Surface grinding with continuous infeed ● CYCLE4079: Surface grinding with intermittent infeed References For further information about oscillating cycles, please refer to: Programming Manual, Production Planning; Chapter "Programming cycles externally" > "Technological cycles"...

  • Page 503: Swiveling

    Configuring cycles 7.7 Swiveling Swiveling 7.7.1 Technology cycles for swiveling Requirement Only applies for technology milling. The commissioning of the kinematic chain of the machine is a mandatory requirement for correct swiveling functionality (CYCLE800). The kinematic chain is stored in the tool parameters $TC_CARR1 to $TC_CARR65.
  • Page 504 Configuring cycles 7.7 Swiveling = 1 Selection text retraction "Fixed point 1" or retraction "Fixed point 2". If you modify the retraction variants "Z" or "ZXY" over the manufacturer cycle CUST_800.SPF, the neutral texts "Fixed point 1" and "Fixed point 2" are displayed in this case.
  • Page 505 Configuring cycles 7.7 Swiveling MD20126 $MC_TOOL_CARRIER_RESET_VALUE Active toolholder at RESET No active toolholder at RESET = > 0 (n) Toolholder with number n active at RESET MD20126 is written to in CYCLE800 CYCLE800() corresponds to deselect toolholder (MD20126 = 0) MD20150 $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES[ ] Delete position, G group.
  • Page 506 Configuring cycles 7.7 Swiveling MD20360 $MC_TOOL_PARAMETER_DEF_MASK Tool parameter setting Bit 10 = 1 Orientation vector remains at T0 or D0 (no tool) Used for machine kinematics, types "T" and "M" See parameter $TC_CARR34 Bit 19 = 1 The changed orientation vector remains at T0 or D0 (no tool) Bit 19 acts only with bit 10 = 1 MD21186 $MC_TOCARR_ROT_OFFSET_FROM_FR Offset of the rotary axes for a tool holder...
  • Page 507 Configuring cycles 7.7 Swiveling = 0 Not active = 1 Remains active MD24007 $MC_CHSFRAME_RESET_CLEAR_MASK Clear system frames after RESET Bit 4 System frame workpiece reference = 0 Do not delete = 1 Delete When used for measuring or swiveling in JOG, the workpiece reference must be active at RESET and not cleared (cascaded measuring).
  • Page 508 Configuring cycles 7.7 Swiveling MD28083 $MC_MM_SYSTEM_DATAFRAME_MASK Setting-up data management, system frames (SRAM) Bit 2 = 1 Rotary table reference ($P_PARTFRAME) Bit 3 = 1 Tool reference ($P_TOOLFRAME) Bit 4 = 1 Workpiece reference ($P_WPFRAME) MD28085 $MC_MM_LINK_TOA_UNIT Assigning a TO unit to a channel (SRAM) If several channels are set-up, then the following can be set in the machine data: The number of toolholders (see MD18088) on the TO unit per channel.

  • Page 509: Cycle800 Checklist For The Identification Of The Machine Kinematics

    Configuring cycles 7.7 Swiveling Swiveling in the JOG mode Cycle alarms 62186 and 62187 can be hidden or displayed using the following cycle machine data: MD55410 $MC_MILL_SWIVEL_ALARM_MASK Activate fault evaluation CYCLE800 Bit 0 Activates fault 61186 = 0 Hide fault 61186 "Active zero offset G%4 and base (base reference) contains rotations" (default setting).

  • Page 510: Commissioning Swivel Data (Kinematics Chain)

    Configuring cycles 7.7 Swiveling ● What is the initial setting of the kinematics? This defines the tool orientation and the plane G17, G18, G19. ● Which rotary axis rotates around which axis of the coordinate system or the machine axis (axes)? This defines the rotary axis vectors of the kinematics.
  • Page 511 Configuring cycles 7.7 Swiveling Kinematic types $TC_CARR23[n] Following kinematics types are available for selection: Swivel head (type T) Swivel table (type P) Swivel head + Swivel table (type M) Offset vector I1 Offset vector I2 Offset vector I1 Rotary axis vector V1 Rotary axis vector V1 Rotary axis vector V1 Offset vector I2...
  • Page 512 Configuring cycles 7.7 Swiveling A name is assigned to every swivel data set: $TC_CARR34[n] The name of the swivel data set may only contain characters that are permissible for NC programming: A...Z, 0...9 and _ ! Offset vectors I1 to I4 $TC_CARR1[n] ... $TC_CARR20[n] The vectors always contain three components which represent the reference to the machine axes (X, Y, Z).
  • Page 513 Configuring cycles 7.7 Swiveling The fine offsets act in addition to the corresponding base vectors when the Swivel function CYCLE800 or the NC function TCARR=n is called. $TC_CARR41[n] $TC_CARR60[n] Assignment of the basic vectors to the vectors of the fine offset: $TC_CARR1...3[n] $TC_CARR41...43[n] $TC_CARR4...6[n]...
  • Page 514 Configuring cycles 7.7 Swiveling The following identifiers should be preferably chosen for the names of the rotary axes: ● Rotary axis rotates around machine axis X → A ● Rotary axis rotates around machine axis X → B ● Rotary axis rotates around machine axis Z → C The channel names of the corresponding NC rotary axes must be entered for automatic rotary axes: $TC_CARR37[n] in the TENS and HUNDREDS position: Mode automatic.
  • Page 515 Configuring cycles 7.7 Swiveling $TC_CARR37[n] Display variants of the input screens for CYCLE800 Decimal place Meaning 3 = Direction reference, rotary axis 1, direction selec‐ tion Minus in the basic setting of the kinematics. 4 = Direction reference, rotary axis 2, direction selec‐ tion Minus in the basic setting of the kinematics.
  • Page 516 Configuring cycles 7.7 Swiveling $TC_CARR37[n] Display variants of the input screens for CYCLE800 Decimal place Meaning 5 = Swivel data set enabled Automatic swivel data set change and manual tool change 6 = Swivel data set enabled Manual swivel data set change and automatic tool change 7 = Swivel data set enabled Manual swivel data set and tool change...
  • Page 517 Configuring cycles 7.7 Swiveling NOTICE Collision avoidance Make sure that the tool and the workpiece cannot collide during swivelling when moving the tool axes. Retracting axis Z or retracting axes Z, XY is realized as an absolute machine position at the values of parameters $TC_CARR38[n] to $TC_CARR40[n].

  • Page 518: Examples Of Machine Kinematics For The Commissioning Of The Swivel Function

    Configuring cycles 7.7 Swiveling 7.7.4 Examples of machine kinematics for the commissioning of the Swivel function Example 1: Swivel head 1 "HEAD_1" The vectors in the drawing refer to the initial setting of the kinematics. The drawing is not true to scale.
  • Page 519 Configuring cycles 7.7 Swiveling Kinematics Swivel head HEAD_1 Direction reference Rotary axis 2 Correct tool Rotary axes Rotary axis 1 Mode Manual Angular range 0.000 360.000 Rotary axis 2 Mode Manual Angular range -15.000 100.000 Example 2: Swivel head 2 "HEAD_2" The vectors in the drawing refer to the initial setting of the kinematics.
  • Page 520 Configuring cycles 7.7 Swiveling Kinematics Swivel head HEAD_2 Retraction Tool direction Max.+inc. 200.000 Offset vector I1 0.000 -172.000 -265.800 Rotary axis vector V1 0.000 1.000 0.000 Offset vector I2 0.000 172.000 172.000 Rotary axis vector V2 0.000 1.000 1.000 Offset vector I3 0.000 0.000 93.800...
  • Page 521 Configuring cycles 7.7 Swiveling Rotary axis vector V1 Rotary axis B rotates around Y and around Z. Rotary axis vector V2 Rotary axis C rotates about Z. Offset vector I2 The distance from the reference point of the machine to the center of rotation/ intersection of rotary axis 1.
  • Page 522 Configuring cycles 7.7 Swiveling Kinematics Swivel table TABLE_45 Rotary axis 2 Mode Auto Angular range 0.000 360.000 1) Calculation of rotary axis vector: V1: β = -45 degrees V1Y = sin(-45) = -0.7071 V1Z = cos(-45) = 0.7071 V1Y and V1Z can be normalized to -1 and 1. Example 4: Swivel head/rotary table "MIXED_45"...
  • Page 523 Configuring cycles 7.7 Swiveling Rotary axis vector V1 Rotary axis B rotates around Y and around Z. Rotary axis vector V2 Rotary axis C rotates about Z. Offset vector I2 The distance from the reference point of the tool adapter to the center of rotation/intersection of rotary axis 1 Offset vector I1 Closure of vector chain, I1 = - I2.
  • Page 524 Configuring cycles 7.7 Swiveling Kinematics Mixed kinematics MIXED_45 Rotary axis 2 Mode Auto Angular range 0.000 360.000 1) Calculation of rotary axis vector: V1: β = 45 degrees V1Y = sin(-45) = -0.7071 V1Z = cos(-45) = 0.7071 V1Y and V1Z can be normalized to 1. Example 5: Swivel table "TABLE_5"...
  • Page 525 Configuring cycles 7.7 Swiveling Rotary axis vector V2 Rotary axis C rotates about Z. Offset vector I2 The distance from the reference point of the machine to the center of rotation/ intersection of rotary axis 1. Offset vector I3 The distance from the center of rotation of rotary axis 1 to the center of rota‐ tion/intersection of rotary axis 2.
  • Page 526 Configuring cycles 7.7 Swiveling Rotary axis vector V1 The rotary axis A rotates about X. Rotary axis vector V2 Rotary axis C rotates about Z. Offset vector I2 The distance from the reference point of the machine to the center of rotation/ intersection of rotary axis 1.

  • Page 527: Manufacturer Cycle Cust_800.Spf

    Configuring cycles 7.7 Swiveling Kinematics Swivel table TABLE_5 Rotary axis 2 Mode Auto Angular range 0.000 360.000 7.7.5 Manufacturer cycle CUST_800.SPF Function During swiveling, all axis positions are approached using the CUST_800.SPF cycle. The call is exclusively made from the swivel cycle CYCLE800 or from the cycles E_TCARR (ShopMill) or F_TCARR (ShopTurn).
  • Page 528 Configuring cycles 7.7 Swiveling Figure 7-15 Structure (coarse) of swivel cycles SINUMERIK Operate Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 529 Configuring cycles 7.7 Swiveling CYCLE800 structured chart Sequence in AUTOMATIC mode Figure 7-16 Structure: CYCLE800.SPF / CUST_800.SPF SINUMERIK Operate Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 530 Configuring cycles 7.7 Swiveling Figure 7-17 Structure: E_TCARR.SPF (F_TCARR.SPF) / CUST_800.SPF SINUMERIK Operate Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 531 Configuring cycles 7.7 Swiveling Note on markers _M2 to _M13 When the swivel data set or tool is changed, the linear axes are recovered using the last retraction mode (modal). If this behavior is not desired in milling/turning, the corresponding calls must be commented out with a semicolon (;).
  • Page 532 Configuring cycles 7.7 Swiveling Note on marker _M40 This marker is called before the calculation and activation of the tool holder function as user initialization. This makes it possible for special kinematics, to calculate or rewrite the current vectors of the active swivel data set. Boring mill application example: For parallel axes, the vector in the Z direction can be updated with the actual value of the W axis.

  • Page 533: Cycle996 Measure Workpiece Kinematics

    Configuring cycles 7.7 Swiveling Note on swiveling without active tool compensation If swiveling the rotary axes without active tool cutting edge (D0) is not possible, then you can adapt this in cycle CUST_800.SPF: _M40: IF ((NOT $P_TOOL) AND _TC1) LOOP MSG ("No tool cutting edge active") STOPRE ENDLOOP...
  • Page 534 Requirements The following requirements must be met in order to use CYCLE996 (Measure kinematics): ● SIEMENS measuring cycles package is installed ● Workpiece probe is calibrated ● Calibration ball is mounted ● oriented tool carrier is set up (MD18088 MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER > 0) ●...

  • Page 535: High Speed Cutting (Hsc)

    Configuring cycles 7.8 High Speed Cutting (HSC) High Speed Cutting (HSC) 7.8.1 High speed settings: Configuring CYCLE832 Function The High Speed Settings function (CYCLE832) is used to preset data for the machining of sculptured surfaces so that optimum machining is possible. The call of CYCLE832 contains three parameters: ●...

  • Page 536: Manufacturer Cycle Cust_832.Spf

    Configuring cycles 7.8 High Speed Cutting (HSC) Dynamic parameters can be adapted to the respective machining operation with the technology G groups. Using the commands of technology G group 59, the value of the following channel and axis-specific machine data is activated using the corresponding array index: MD20600 $MC_MAX_PATH_JERK[0..4] Path dependent maximum jerk.

  • Page 537: Top Surface: Cycle832 Extension

    Configuring cycles 7.8 High Speed Cutting (HSC) COMPCAD G645 FIFOCTRL UPATH ;FFWON Dependent on the machining type: DYNNORM DYNFINISH DYNSEMIFIN DYNROUGH 7.8.3 Top Surface: CYCLE832 extension Function Besides Advanced Surface, the High Speed Settings (CYCLE832) function also offers the extension Top Surface. You can use Top Surface to improve the quality of free-form surfaces. If set actively, the continuous-path control is optimized within contour tolerances.

  • Page 538: Measuring Cycles And Measurement Functions

    Configuring cycles 7.9 Measuring cycles and measurement functions Extension in manufacturer cycle CUST_832.SPF The following labels are provided in manufacturing cycle CUST_832.spf for Top Surface: Finishing with COMPSURF 31 _M_TOP_SURFACE_FINISH: Semi-finishing with COMPSURF 32 _M_TOP_SURFACE_SEMIFINISH: Roughing with COMPSURF 33 _M_TOP_SURFACE_ROUGH: The following G commands are programmed in labels 31 to 33: SOFT COMPSURF...
  • Page 539 Configuring cycles 7.9 Measuring cycles and measurement functions MD13210 $MN_MEAS_TYPE Measuring type for distributed drives Standard value, not adjustable Testing the probe function You can test the switching function of the probe by manually deflecting it and checking the following PLC interface signals: DB2700 General signals from the NC NC ->...
  • Page 540 Configuring cycles 7.9 Measuring cycles and measurement functions Program code Comment N45 R2=$AA_MW[X] ;Save measured value in workpiece coordi- nates at R2 N50 M0 ;Check measured value in R1/R2 N55 M30 N60 _FEHL1: MSG ("Probe does not switch!") N65 M0 N70 M30 General function settings for measuring cycles MD51740 $MNS_MEA_FUNCTION_MASK...

  • Page 541: Manufacturer And User Cycle Cust_Meacyc.spf

    Configuring cycles 7.9 Measuring cycles and measurement functions Bit 2 Workpiece measurement: M0 for tolerance alarms 62304 oversize, 62305 undersize, 62306 permissible dimensional difference exceeded Bit 3 Accept calibrated workpiece probe radius in the tool data. Bit 4 For turning-milling technology, the calibration/measuring plane is different. Bit 16 Repetitive measurement: tool measurement after a dimensional difference has been fallen below (parameter _TDIF) and or confidence range (parameter _TSA)
  • Page 542 Configuring cycles 7.9 Measuring cycles and measurement functions You can use the CUST_MEACYC.SPF to program and execute sequences that are necessary before and/or after a measurement (e.g. activating/deactivating a probe). Note Copy the CUST_MEACYC cycle from the NC data/Cycles/Standard cycles directory to the NC data/Cycles/User cycles directory before making any changes.
  • Page 543 Configuring cycles 7.9 Measuring cycles and measurement functions CUST_MEACYC structogram Sequence in the AUTOMATIC mode, using measure bore as example, CYCLE977 with probe type 712. Figure 7-19 Structure: CYCLE977 / CUST_MEACYC SINUMERIK Operate Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 544: Measuring In The Jog Mode

    Configuring cycles 7.9 Measuring cycles and measurement functions 7.9.3 Measuring in the JOG mode Preconditions You have already made the settings from the previous section "Measuring cycles and measurement functions, general (Page 170)". Workpiece measurement For milling: ● The probe has been inserted in the tool spindle. ●...
  • Page 545 Configuring cycles 7.9 Measuring cycles and measurement functions MD52750 $MCS_J_MEA_FIXPOINT Z value for measurement with respect to a fixed point Position in the 1st axis Position in the 2nd axis MD52751 $MCS_J_MEA_MAGN_GLAS_POS Zoom-in position for tool measurement Position in the 1st axis Position in the 2nd axis Checking and setting the general machine data MD11450 $MN_SEARCH_RUN_MODE...

  • Page 546: Measuring Workpieces At The Milling Machines

    Configuring cycles 7.9 Measuring cycles and measurement functions MD20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK Activates tool manager functions = 4002H Minimum value Bit 1 = 1 Tool manager and monitoring functions active Bit 14 = 1 Automatic tool change for RESET and Start. MD28082 $MC_SYSTEM_FRAME_MASK System frames (SRAM).
  • Page 547 Configuring cycles 7.9 Measuring cycles and measurement functions Note Measuring feedrate for workpiece measuring All measuring cycles use the value saved in SD54611 as the measuring feedrate value following calibration of the workpiece probe. A different measuring feedrate can be assigned for each calibration field [n].

  • Page 548: Measuring Tools At The Milling Machines

    Configuring cycles 7.9 Measuring cycles and measurement functions General cycle setting data SD54780 $SNS_J_MEA_FUNCTION_MASK_PIECE Configuration of the input screens for measuring in the "Machine" operating area in the JOG operating mode. = 512 Default value Bit 2 = 1 Activates measurements with an electronic probe. Bit 3 = 1 Selects the probe calibration data, enable.
  • Page 549 Configuring cycles 7.9 Measuring cycles and measurement functions The following setting data is used to define in which axes and directions it is possible to calibrate a tool probe. SD54632 $SNS_MEA_T_PROBE_ALLOW_AX_DIR[k] Axes and directions for "calibration" = 133 Default value Decimal place ONES 1.
  • Page 550 Configuring cycles 7.9 Measuring cycles and measurement functions SD54634 $SNS_MEA_TP_CAL_MEASURE_DEPTH[n] Distance between the tool probe up‐ per edge and the milling tool lower edge. Default value MD51752 $MNS_J_MEA_M_DIST_TOOL_LENGTH Measuring path to measure the tool length. Default value MD51753 $MNS_J_MEA_M_DIST_TOOL_RADIUS Measuring path to measure the tool ra‐ dius.
  • Page 551 Configuring cycles 7.9 Measuring cycles and measurement functions SD54674 $SNS_MEA_CM_SPIND_ROT_DIR[0] Spindle direction of rotation to measure tools. Spindle rotation the same as M4 (default value) Note If the spindle is already rotating when the measuring cycle is called, this direction of rotation remains independent of the setting of this data.
  • Page 552 Configuring cycles 7.9 Measuring cycles and measurement functions SD54693 $SNS_MEA_T_MAX_STEPS Maximum number of probe contacts for single cutting edge measurement of the radius. = 10 Default value If the value = 0, then the "highest point on the longest cutting edge" is not sought, but the measured value of the contact with the rotating spindle taken.

  • Page 553: Measuring Tools At The Turning Machines

    Configuring cycles 7.9 Measuring cycles and measurement functions 7.9.3.3 Measuring tools at the turning machines Measuring feedrate for tool measurement in turning operation SD55628 $SCS_MEA_TP_FEED_MEASURE Calibrate measuring feedrate for tool probe and measure tool with station‐ ary spindle. = 300 Default value Note Measuring feedrate for tool measuring...

  • Page 554: Measuring Without Electronic Probe In Jog

    Configuring cycles 7.9 Measuring cycles and measurement functions Read access rights: Access level 4 (keyswitch 3), default value Write access: Access level 3 (user) 7.9.3.4 Measuring without electronic probe in JOG Measure workpiece For manual measuring functions in the JOG operating mode, for which a rotating spindle is required, the following applies: ●...
  • Page 555 Configuring cycles 7.9 Measuring cycles and measurement functions Workpiece measurement Sequence in milling technology: 1. The probe has been selected in the tool list as type 7xx (probe). 2. The probe has been inserted in the tool spindle. 3. The probe is activated in the actual NC channel. Sequence in turning technology: 1.

  • Page 556: Measuring Workpieces, General

    Configuring cycles 7.9 Measuring cycles and measurement functions SD55623 $SCS_MEA_EMPIRIC_VALUE[n] Empirical values Default value SD55618 $SCS_MEA_SIM_ENABLE Measuring cycle simulation When calling measuring cycles in conjunction with SINUMERIK Operate, ShopMill or Shop‐ Turn simulation, the measuring cycles are skipped, default value. Default setting: When calling measuring cycles in conjunction with SINUMERIK Operate, ShopMill or Shop‐...
  • Page 557 Configuring cycles 7.9 Measuring cycles and measurement functions Requirement You have already made the settings from the following section: See also: Measuring cycles and measurement functions, general (Page 170) Settings General cycle setting data SD54760 $SNS_MEA_FUNCTION_MASK_PIECE Settings for the input screen, measuring cycles in AUTOMATIC, workpiece meas‐...
  • Page 558 Configuring cycles 7.9 Measuring cycles and measurement functions Note Measuring feedrate for workpiece measuring All measuring cycles use the value saved in SD54611 $SNS_MEA_WP_FEED[n] as measuring feedrate after the tool probe has been calibrated. A different measuring feedrate can be assigned for each calibration field [n]. When calibrating the probe, either the measuring feedrate from SD55630 $SCS_MEA_FEED__MEASURE is used, or the measuring feedrate can be overwritten in the input screen when calibrating.

  • Page 559: Measuring Workpieces At The Milling Machines

    Configuring cycles 7.9 Measuring cycles and measurement functions SD55642 $SCS_MEA_EDGE_SAVE_ANG Safety angle when measuring a corner (CYCLE961) Degrees This angle is added to the angle that the user entered between the workpiece reference edge and the 1st axis of the active coordinate system in a positive direction, and refers to the corner measurement in the automatic mode (CYCLE961).

  • Page 560: Measuring Tools At The Milling Machines

    Configuring cycles 7.9 Measuring cycles and measurement functions SD54606 $SNS_MEA_WP_TRIG_PLUS_DIR_AX3[n] Trigger point, plus direction, 3rd measuring axis opposite to the tool direction. In the default case = 0. SD54607 $SNS_MEA_WP_POS_DEV_AX1[n] Position deviation, 1st measuring axis in the plane. SD54608 $SNS_MEA_WP_POS_DEV_AX2[n] Position deviation, 2nd measuring axis in the plane.
  • Page 561 Configuring cycles 7.9 Measuring cycles and measurement functions Note Calibrate probe If you have calibrated the tool probe in JOG mode, then the calibration data has already been correctly entered in: SD54632 $SNS_MEA_TP_AX_DIR_AUTO_CAL[k] You do not need to recalibrate the tool probe in the AUTOMATIC mode. Index [k] stands for the number of the actual data field (probe number -1).
  • Page 562 Configuring cycles 7.9 Measuring cycles and measurement functions Decimal place HUNDREDS 3rd axis axis not possible only minus direction only plus direction both directions Example If the general cycle machine data SD54632 $SNS_MEA_TP_AX_DIR_AUTO_CAL has the value 123, the tool probe is calibrated as follows in the G17 plane: ●...
  • Page 563 Configuring cycles 7.9 Measuring cycles and measurement functions SD54644 $SNS_MEA_TPW_TRIG_MINUS_DIR_AX3[k] Trigger point of the 3rd measuring axis in the negative direction. SD54645 $SNS_MEA_TPW_TRIG_PLUS_DIR_AX3[k] Trigger point of the 3rd measuring axis in the positive direction. SD54646 $SNS_MEA_TPW_EDGE_DISK_SIZE[k] Tool probe, edge length / disk diameter. SD54647 $SNS_MEA_TPW_AX_DIR_AUTO_CAL[k] Automatic calibration of tool probe, en‐...
  • Page 564 Configuring cycles 7.9 Measuring cycles and measurement functions Example If the general cycle machine data SD54647 $SNS_MEA_TPW_AX_DIR_AUTO_CAL has the value 123, the tool probe is calibrated as follows in the G17 plane: ● X in both directions ● Y only in plus direction ●...
  • Page 565 Configuring cycles 7.9 Measuring cycles and measurement functions Only single probing with the feedrate calculated by the cycle. However, as a minimum, the value from SD54673[0] $SNS_MEA_CM_MIN_FEEDRATE. = ≥ 1 First probing with feedrate. However, as a minimum with the value from SD54673[0] $SNS_MEA_CM_MIN_FEEDRATE) SD54675[0] $SNS_MEA_CM_FEEDFACTOR_1 SD54676 $SNS_MEA_CM_FEEDFACTOR_2[0]...

  • Page 566: Measuring Workpieces At The Turning Machines

    Configuring cycles 7.9 Measuring cycles and measurement functions Correction values for users If the general cycle setting data SD54691 $SNS_MEA_T_PROBE_OFFSET= 2, the following settings apply: SD54695 to SD54700 Correction values for radius meas‐ See the subsequent general cycle urement. setting data. SD54705 to SD54710 Correction values for length meas‐...

  • Page 567: Measuring Tools At The Turning Machines

    Configuring cycles 7.9 Measuring cycles and measurement functions SD54621 $SNS_MEA_CAL_EDGE_PLUS_DIR_AX2[n] Calibration slot edge in the positive direc‐ tion of the 2nd measuring axis. SD54622 $SNS_MEA_CAL_EDGE_MINUS_DIR_AX2[n] Calibration slot edge in the negative di‐ rection of the 2nd measuring axis. Note For a standard lathe with axes X and Z (G18), axis Z is the 1st measuring axis and axis X is the 2nd measuring axis.

  • Page 568: Compare Cycles Version

    Configuring cycles 7.10 Compare cycles version 7.10 Compare cycles version 7.10.1 Display cycles version If cycles have version details, you can display them in the version screen. Precondition The version details are included in the cycles files in the following form: ;VERSION: <Version>...

  • Page 569: Specify Cycles Version

    Configuring cycles 7.10 Compare cycles version Procedure Select the "Diagnostics" operating area. Press the "Version" softkey. It takes some time to call the version display. While the version data is being determined a progress message box and the appropriate text are displayed in the dialog line.
  • Page 570 7.10 Compare cycles version File overview The following files are required: Name Path Meaning versions.xml /siemens/sinumerik/hmi/data/version/oem/cma Version file versions.xml /oem/ Version path file Adapting the version file The cycles version specification requires a manual adaptation of the version file. 1. Copy the "versions.xml" sample file from the following directory: /siemens/sinumerik/hmi/data/version/oem/cma 2.

  • Page 571: Cycle Protection (Option)

    Configuring cycles 7.11 Cycle protection (option) </Component> Example: <Component> <Name>Manufacturer Cycles</Name> <Path>/oem/sinumerik/hmi/data/version/oem/cma</Path> </Component> 7.11 Cycle protection (option) 7.11.1 Overview, cycle protection Application With cycle protection, cycles can be encrypted and then stored in the control protected. The processing of cycles with cycle protection in the NC is possible without restrictions. Software option You require the following software option in order to use this function: "Lock MyCy‐...
  • Page 572 Compatibility of the encryption We do not recommend loading encrypted cycles into older software versions using option "- e2". Siemens cycles that are supplied always match the software release. Cycles encrypted with "–e1" and "-e2" can be mixed. Copying encrypted cycles The encrypted cycle can be copied and therefore used at other machines.

  • Page 573: Spindle Function

    Spindle function Spindle control You can select from the following spindle control settings: End of program The following M functions are used for the end of program: M function from Main program end Spindle continues MD10714 $MN_M_NO_FCT_EOP to run M2, M30 End of main program and return jump to Spindle stops beginning of program...
  • Page 574 Automatic ASUP start (PROG_EVENT) after output of action sets. Alarm 10208 is not output until the ASUB is completed. Notice: The PROG_EVENT cycle cannot be changed for the SINUMERIK 828D. Manufacturer- specific entries are possible only in the CYCPE_MA and CYCPE_US cycles. References...

  • Page 575: Analog Spindle

    Spindle function 8.3 Leadscrew error compensation Analog spindle Machine axis index for analog spindle For a spindle which is not assigned to any drive (FD, MSD, SLM), the power display can be controlled via the PLC. In order that the operating software identifies the spindle as analog spindle, enter the axis index of the analog spindle in the following machine data: MD51068 $MNS_SPIND_DRIVELOAD_FROM_PLC1 Machine axis index spindle 1...
  • Page 576 Spindle function 8.4 Spindle diagnostics Press the "Configuration" softkey to edit the compensation values for a selected axis. The "Configuration of the Compensation Tables" window opens. Enter the following: ● Type of compensation: EEC or CEC. ● Start position, end position and interpolation point spacing. ●...
  • Page 577 Spindle function 8.4 Spindle diagnostics ● Clamping system ● Logistics data Requirements ● A spindle with DQI encoder: r0459, bit 14 = 1. ● Drive telegram 139 is configured for the spindle. ● The spindle functionality for the machine axis is present when MD35000 $MA_SPIND_ASSIGN_TO_MACHAX >...
  • Page 578 If several spindles are in operation, select the desired spindle using the "Spindle +" or "Spindle -" softkey. See also Commissioning of a hybrid spindle with SMI 24 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/) 8.4.2 Temperatures Which temperatures are evaluated and displayed depends on the number and the mounting location (e.g.

  • Page 579: 8.4 Spindle Diagnostics

    Spindle function 8.4 Spindle diagnostics Signal Sensor Column/meaning Description Motor temperature Limit Stored threshold for motor overtem‐ perature as of which a fault is issued Fault due to KTY motor overtemperature. Duration of the upper Displays the accumulated hours dur‐ limit violation ing which an upper limit violation was present.

  • Page 580: 8.4 Spindle Diagnostics

    Spindle function 8.4 Spindle diagnostics Signal Sensor Column/meaning Description Additional temperature Limit Stored temperature threshold as of which a fault is issued, e.g. due to Fault bearing overtemperature. Duration of the upper Displays the accumulated hours dur‐ limit violation ing which an upper limit violation was present.

  • Page 581: Additional Temperature Sensor

    Spindle function 8.4 Spindle diagnostics 8.4.4 Additional temperature sensor Shutdown response The alarm and fault thresholds of the additional temperature sensor that are displayed on the user interface as limits, are stored in the SMI24. They are used only for the statistical evaluation of the SMI24.

  • Page 582: Speed/Torque

    Spindle function 8.4 Spindle diagnostics 8.4.6 Speed/torque To check the loads on the spindle, the speed and the torque are recorded in a histogram as a function of the operating hours. The color coding indicates the following states: ● Light green: low load ●...
  • Page 583 Spindle function 8.4 Spindle diagnostics The current state values of the sensors, the tool clamping, the speed setpoint and the active speed limitation are displayed in the signal overview Signal Sensor Description Value Meaning State Clamping state Released 7 or 8 Clamped with tool Clamped without tool Piston free...

  • Page 584: Clamping System: Speed Limits

    Spindle function 8.4 Spindle diagnostics Procedure 1. The "S1 Spindle Diagnostics" window is open. The "S1 Clamping System" window is open without the "S-Monitor" software option. 2. Press the "Clamping system" softkey. The "S1 Clamping System" window opens and displays the acquired data. 3.

  • Page 585: Clamping System: Diagnostic Statistics

    Spindle function 8.4 Spindle diagnostics Procedure 1. The "S1 Spindle Diagnostics" window is open. The "S1 Clamping System" window is open without the "S-Monitor" software option. 2. Press the "Clamping system" softkey. The "S1 Clamping System" window opens and displays the acquired data. 3.

  • Page 586: Clamping System: Clamping Time Statistics

    Spindle function 8.4 Spindle diagnostics Statistical data Meaning ● Speed threshold Limit for the spindle speed in the "Clamped without tool" clamp‐ ing state (as-delivered value). Changing this speed limit via the diagnostics overview "S1 clamping system" → "Speed limits" → "Change" has no effect on the value specified here.

  • Page 587: Fetching The Logistics Data

    Spindle function 8.4 Spindle diagnostics 8.4.11 Fetching the logistics data Requirement The spindle characteristics can only be read out with the "Service" access level. Spindle characteristics The following spindle manufacturer characteristics can be read out via DRIVE-CLiQ: ● Manufacturer's identifier ●...
  • Page 588 Spindle function 8.4 Spindle diagnostics SINUMERIK Operate Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 589: Tool Management

    Tool management Machine data for tool management 9.1.1 Settings with/without magazine management Setting without magazine management Make the following settings if you are commissioning the tool management without NC magazine management: MD18080 $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK Memory for the tool management is re‐ served step-by-step (SRAM).
  • Page 590 Tool management 9.1 Machine data for tool management MD28450 $MC_MM_TOOL_DATA_CHG_BUFF_SIZE Buffer for changing tool data (DRAM). = 100 Number of entries in the buffer for the OPI change service for tool data. Dynamic memory is used. This buffer is only created if either bit 2 or bit 3 is set in MD17530 $MN_TOOL_DA‐ TA_CHANGE_COUNTER.

  • Page 591: Configuring The Access Levels Of The Tool Management

    Tool management 9.1 Machine data for tool management MD28450 $MC_MM_TOOL_DATA_CHG_BUFF_SIZE Buffer for changing tool data (DRAM). = 100 Number of entries in the buffer for the OPI change service for tool data. Dynamic memory is used. This buffer is only created if either bit 2 or bit 3 is set in MD17530 $MN_TOOL_DA‐ TA_CHANGE_COUNTER.

  • Page 592: Additional Settings

    Tool management 9.1 Machine data for tool management Access levels for window "Internal Data" MD51198 $MNS_ACCESS_READ_TM_ALL_PARAM Protection level TOOLMAN details - Read internal data. Depending on the machine data, the "Internal Data" softkey is either hidden or displayed. MD51215 $MNS_ACCESS_WRITE_TM_ALL_PARAM Access level TOOLMAN details - Write internal data.
  • Page 593 Tool management 9.1 Machine data for tool management Bit 11 Reactivate tool in all monitoring types. Bit 12 Hide reactivating tool. SD54215 $SNS_TM_FUNCTION_MASK_SET Bit 0 Diameter display for rotating tools. Cutting edge parameters 6 (tool nose radius) and 15 (wear radius) are not displayed as a radius value, but as a diameter value for the following tool types: Types 100 to 299, 580, 710, 711, 712, 713, 714 and 725.
  • Page 594 Tool management 9.1 Machine data for tool management Dependencies The setting data SD54215 $TM_FUNCTION_MASK_SET and the machine data MD20360 $TOOL_PARAMETER_DEF_MASK have the following dependencies: Dependency Description Recommendation SD54215 ⇔ MD20360 Bit 9 ⇔ Bit 0 If bit 0 is set in MD20360, then SD54215 It is recommended that the setting MD20360 bit 9 has no effect because the NC already bit 0 and bit 1 not be used.
  • Page 595 Tool management 9.1 Machine data for tool management Supplementary conditions: ● MD52200 $MCS_TECHNOLOGY = 2 (milling) ● MD52201 $MCS_TECHNOLOGY_EXTENSION = 0 Default settings for unloading/loading and relocating MD52272 $MCS_TM_TOOL_LOAD_DEFAULT_MAG Default magazine for loading tools. No default magazine, default value MD52273 $MCS_TM_TOOL_MOVE_DEFAULT_MAG Default magazine for relocating tools.

  • Page 596: Configuring The User Interface

    ● Configuring the code carrier connection ● Configuring store to file The following sections explain how you configure these adaptations. Procedure 1. Open the directory: /siemens/sinumerik/hmi/template/cfg. 2. Copy the "oem_sltmlistconfig.xml" template file 3. Copy the file to the directory /oem/sinumerik/hmi/cfg OR: /user/sinumerik/hmi/cfg.
  • Page 597 Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface 4. Change the file name according to the set technology: File name Technology sltmlistconfig.xml Milling technology sltmturninglistconfig.xml Turning technology sltmcirculargrindinglistconfig.xml Cylindrical grinding technology sltmsurfacegrindinglistconfig.xml Surface grinding technology sltmplclistconfig.xml PLC tool management "TRANSLINE 2000" 5.

  • Page 598: General Settings

    Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface Identifier <tag> for the following setting: Configuring the "Details" window (Page 266) <DETAILSCONFIGURATION> Assigning a name for magazines and magazine <MAGAZINEPLACENAMECONFIGURATION> locations (Page 269) Configuring the "Assign Tooltips for Multitool Lo‐ <MULTITOOLPLACETOOLTIPCONFIGURATION> cations" window (Page 271) Assigning a name for magazine location types <PLACETYPECONFIGURATION>...
  • Page 599 Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface Entries Meaning CreateNewMultiToolDialog True - default setting, the "New Multitool" window is dis‐ played. In this window, you can configure the following be‐ fore actually creating the multitool: ● Multitool names ● Number of multitool locations ●...
  • Page 600 Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface Entries Meaning AutoUniqueDNumberDisplayEnabled Column of the cutting edge parameter "UniqueDNo" de‐ pending on the machine configuration. True - default setting, the column is automatically displayed. False - the column is not automatically displayed. AccessLevelDeleteAllDNos The following entry specifies the access level as of which the "Delete all D numbers delete"...
  • Page 601 Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface Entries Meaning CursorPositionInfoEnabled True - information about the tool on which the cursor is posi‐ tioned is written to the SlCap local variable "/Hmi/TMHMI‐ CurData". False - default setting, no information about the tool on which the cursor is positioned is made available on an in‐...
  • Page 602 Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface Entries Meaning CombinedToolMonitoring Specifies the combined monitoring types offered in the tog‐ gle field: ● Time/Count - tool life and workpiece count ● Time/Wear - tool life and wear monitoring ● Count/Wear - workpiece count and wear monitoring ●...
  • Page 603 Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface direction holder angle" for this tool do not match, then a red cross is displayed for locked. The yellow triangle for the conflict cannot be seen. Entries Meaning ShowSymbolActivePlace Marking of the magazine location at the machining position. True - default setting applies for the "Turret"...

  • Page 604: Configure The Tool Lists

    Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface <AccessLevelWriteDetailsAllParameter value="4" type="int" /> </SETTINGS> 9.2.2 Configure the tool lists <LISTCONFIGURATION> tag The entries used for configuring the following list views are located in the <LISTCONFIGURATION> tag: ● "Tool List" window, identifier <SlTmToollistForm>, see the 1st example. ●...
  • Page 605 Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface Note Independent of their programming, the entries are effective in the following sequence: 1. COLUMNX 2. DELETE_COLUMN 3. INSERT_COLUMN Note The Enabled entry does not apply for the "Tool Selection" window. The other entries apply. Example 1: Configuring the magazine list - magazine location and tool location type Note The columns of the list configuration cannot be taken from the display in the user interface in...
  • Page 606 Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface <!-- **** Display for all multitool location types *** --> <Item value="MultiToolPlaceSpec" type="QString" /> </TOOLTYPE_9997> </COLUMN11> </SlTmToolmagazinForm> </LISTCONFIGURATION> Variant 2 The new columns are inserted in the standard configuration between the "Magazine location locked"...
  • Page 607 Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface Example 2: Configuring the magazine list - "Oversized tool" column is deleted Note The columns of the list configuration cannot be taken from the display in the user interface in all cases because some columns are automatically inserted and therefore not included in the count of the configuration.

  • Page 608: Tool Parameter Identifiers

    Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface Result ● The "OEM Tool Data" window is displayed. It automatically displays the columns shown in the figure. ● The new "OEM tools" softkey appears and can be operated. 9.2.2.1 Tool parameter identifiers Tool parameters For the tool parameters, the following identifiers are used in the configuration file: Identifier...
  • Page 609 Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface Identifier Parameter or property System variable ToolInMagInPlace Magazine number/Magazine location $A_TOOLMN / $A_TOOL_MLN ToolMonTCW Type of tool monitoring, tool life, workpiece $TC_TP9 count and wear. If wear monitoring has not been enabled via the machine data, this parameter is handled like ToolMonTC.

  • Page 610: Cutting Parameter Identifiers

    ToolUser_1, ... ToolUser_10 OEM tool parameters 1 to 10 $TC_TPC1, ... $TC_TPC10 ToolAppl_1, ... ToolAppl_10 Siemens application tool parameters 1 to 10 $TC_TPCS1, ... $TC_TPCS10 Parameter corresponds to the system variable or the system variable is the basis for this parameter. Note Tool name "ToolIdent"...
  • Page 611 Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface Identifier Parameter or property System variable GeoOutsideRadius Outside radius, cutting parameter 7 $TC_DP7 GeoBoomLength Cantilever length, cutting parameter 7 $TC_DP7 GeoLength4 Length 4, cutting parameter 8 $TC_DP8 PlateLength Cutting tip length, cutting parameter 8 $TC_DP8 GeoLength5 Length 5, cutting parameter 9...

  • Page 612: Monitoring Parameter Identifiers

    OEM cutting parameters 1 to 10 $TC_DPC1, ... User_10, $TC_DPC10 EdgeAppl_1, ..., Edge‐ Siemens application cutting parameters 1 to 10 $TC_DPCS1, ... Appl_10x $TC_DPCS10 Parameter corresponds to the system variable or the system variable is the basis for this parameter.

  • Page 613: Grinding Parameter Identifiers

    OEM cutting edge monitoring parameters 1 to 10 $TC_MOPC1, ... EdgeSupUser_10 $TC_MOPC10 EdgeSupAppl_1, ... Edge‐ Siemens application cutting edge monitoring pa‐ $TC_MOPCS1, ... SupAppl_10 rameters 1 to 10 $TC_MOPCS10 Parameter corresponds to the system variable or the system variable is the basis for this parameter.

  • Page 614: Magazine Location Parameter Identifiers

    OEM magazine location parameters 1 to 10 $TC_MPPC1, ... ceUser_10 $TC_MPPC10 MagPlaceAppl_1, ... MagPla‐ Siemens magazine location parameters 1 to $TC_MPPCS1, ... ceAppl_10 $TC_MPPCS10 Parameter corresponds to the system variable or the system variable is the basis for this parameter.

  • Page 615: Magazine Location Adapter Parameter Identifiers

    Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface 9.2.2.6 Magazine location adapter parameter identifiers The following identifiers are used in the configuration file for the magazine location adapter parameters: Identifier Parameter or property System variable MagPlaceAdapterLength1 Magazine location adapter length 1 $TC_ADPT1 MagPlaceAdapterLengthGeoAx1 Magazine location adapter geometry axis 1 $TC_ADPT1...

  • Page 616: Multitool Location Parameter Identifiers

    MultiToolUser_1, ... MultiToolUs‐ OEM multitool parameters 1 to 10 $TC_MTPC1, ... er_10 $TC_MTPC10 MultiToolAppl_1, ... MultiToo‐ Siemens application multitool parameters $TC_MTPCS1, ... lAppl_10 1 to 10 $TC_MTPCS10 Parameter corresponds to the system variable or the system variable is the basis for this parameter.

  • Page 617: Configuring List Parameters

    OEM multitool location parameters 1 to 10 $TC_MTPPC1, … tiToolPlaceUser_10 $TC_MTPPC10 MultiToolPlaceAppl_1, … Mul‐ Siemens application multitool location parame‐ $TC_MTPPCS1, … tiToolPlaceAppl_10 ters 1 to 10 $TC_MTPPCS10 Parameter corresponds to the system variable or the system variable is the basis for this parameter.
  • Page 618 Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface Entries Meaning Width Column width in pixels in relation to a 640 x 480 resolution. See example below: The default column width is changed to 53 pixels. DisplayMode Values that the parameter is displayed with. See example below: The default setting is changed to "DoubleMode".
  • Page 619 Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface <Width value="53" type="int" /> <DisplayMode value="DoubleMode" type="QString" /> <DecimalPlaces value="2" type="int" /> </GeoRadius> </PARAMETERCONFIGURATION> Configuring new list parameters based on an existing list parameter. Assign a new parameter name and enter only the changed data: Entries Meaning Assign new parameter name...
  • Page 620 Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface Entries Meaning Also enter only the changed data here. All other data is taken from the existing cutting edge parameter. The following entries are changed: Field type: Input/output field for states Value output: All characters Bit mask: Bit 0 Column width changed to 17 pixels.

  • Page 621: List Of Tool Types

    Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface 9.2.4 List of tool types Coding of tool types for milling tools Group with type 1xy (milling tool): Milling tool according to CLDATA (DIN 66215) Ballhead cutter (cylindrical die milling tool) Ballhead cutter (tapered die milling tool) End mill (without corner rounding) End mill (with corner rounding) Angle head cutter (without corner rounding)
  • Page 622 Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface Dressing roller for surface grinding Dressing wheel for cylindrical grinding Dressing wheel for surface grinding Grinding tool types 401, 402, 403 as well as 411, 412, 413 are not listed as tool types that can be selected.

  • Page 623: Configure Tool Types

    Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface 9.2.5 Configure tool types <TOOLTYPECONFIGURATION> tag The entries used for configuring the tool types are located in the <TOOLTYPECONFIGURATION> tag: Entries Meaning TOOLTYPE_XXX XXX stands for the number of the tool type. For the assignment of the tool type and number, please refer to Section "List of tool types (Page 253)".
  • Page 624 Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface Entries Meaning Iconorder Order in which the tool positions, represented by icons, are switched. DisableInNewToolDialog With this entry, the tool type in question is not offered when new tools are created. If the tool list finds a tool of this type that already exists, it is correspondingly displayed.

  • Page 625: Configuring The "Additional Data" Window

    Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface Example 2 <TOOLTYPECONFIGURATION> <DELETE_TOOLTYPE> <TOOLTYPE_110 /> </DELETE_TOOLTYPE> </TOOLTYPECONFIGURATION> See also General settings (Page 230) 9.2.6 Configuring the "Additional Data" window <MOREDATACONFIGURATION> tag The entries used for configuring the "Additional Data" window are located in the <MOREDATACONFIGURATION>...
  • Page 626 Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface Entries Meaning Item The following entries are possible: ● Parameter identifier ● Text See example: The header "Corner radius" appears in the second row of the window. The text "Radius" and an input field for the value appear in the third row of the window.

  • Page 627: Configure The "New Tool - Favorites" Window

    Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface <WITHOUT_MORE_DATA> <TOOLTYPE_580 /> </WITHOUT_MORE_DATA> </MOREDATACONFIGURATION> 9.2.7 Configure the "New tool - favorites" window <NEWTOOLFAVORITECONFIGURATION> tag In the tag <NEWTOOLFAVORITECONFIGURATION> you define the tool types that are most frequently used. The specified tool types are displayed in the "New Tool - Favorites" window. Entries Meaning StaticTooltypes...

  • Page 628: Configuring The "New Multitool" Window

    Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface Entries Meaning ItemX Entry of the identifier of the tool parameter. "X" specifies the order in which the pa‐ rameters are displayed in the window. The identifier of the tool parameter can be found in Chapter: Tool parameter identifiers (Page 240) Example <NEWTOOLCONFIGURATION>...

  • Page 629: Configuring The "New Tool From Code Carrier" Window

    Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface 9.2.10 Configuring the "New Tool from Code Carrier" window <NEWTOOLIDENTCONNECTIONCONFIGURATION> tag You use the "New Tool from Code Carrier" dialog to identify a new tool before creating it. It is therefore a good idea to display the tool type and the tool name in this window. In addition, the same rules apply as for configuration of the window "New Tool,"...

  • Page 630: Configuring Default Values For New Tools

    Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface 9.2.12 Configuring default values for new tools <NEWTOOLDEFAULTVALUECONFIGURATION> tag In the <NEWTOOLDEFAULTVALUECONFIGURATION> tag, you can specify default values for tools that you create via the user interface. These values can be configured depending on the tool type and, if required, also depending on the cutting edge position: Entries Meaning...
  • Page 631 Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface <CUTTEDGEPOS_3> <Default value="93.0" type="double" /> </CUTTEDGEPOS_3> <CUTTEDGEPOS_4> <Default value="93.0" type="double" /> </CUTTEDGEPOS_4> <CUTTEDGEPOS_5> <Default value="49.0" type="double" /> </CUTTEDGEPOS_5> <CUTTEDGEPOS_6> <Default value="49.0" type="double" /> </CUTTEDGEPOS_6> <CUTTEDGEPOS_7> <Default value="49.0" type="double" /> </CUTTEDGEPOS_7> <CUTTEDGEPOS_8> <Default value="49.0" type="double" /> </CUTTEDGEPOS_8>...
  • Page 632 Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface The following combinations between the cutting-edge position and the cutting direction result dependent on the tool type. When creating the new tool, the operator selects a combination in the "New Tool - Favorites" window. Tool type $TC_DP1 Default values Cutting edge $TC_DP2...
  • Page 633 Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface Tool type $TC_DP1 Default value $TC_DP25 Direction of spindle rotation Type 730/731/732 Bit 8 = 0 Spindle stop Bit 9 = 0 All other tool types Bit 8 = 1 Spindle right Bit 9 = 0 Tool type $TC_DP1 Default value $TC_DP25 for switching direction Type 712 mono probe...

  • Page 634: Configuring The "Details" Window

    Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface 9.2.13 Configuring the "Details" window <DETAILSCONFIGURATION> tag In the tag <DETAILSCONFIGURATION>, you can make the settings for the "Detail" window: Entries Meaning ShowToolNumber The tool number is displayed in the upper right field of the "Detail" window. UseAxisNameInLength The tool length is displayed with axis identifiers, for example, Length X instead of Length 1.
  • Page 635 Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface Each channel is assigned a toolholder. ● Channel 1 MD20124 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER Toolholder number The channel is assigned toolholder 1. ● Channel 2 MD20124 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER Toolholder number The channel is assigned toolholder 1. A revolver magazine with 12 locations, each one loading location and one toolholder, is assigned in both channels.
  • Page 636 Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface ● Both channels are assigned TO unit 1. Channel 1: MD28085 $MC_MM_LINK_TOA_UNIT Assigns TO unit to a channel (SRAM) The channel is assigned TO unit 1. Channel 2: MD28085 $MC_MM_LINK_TOA_UNIT Assigns TO unit to a channel (SRAM) The channel is assigned TO unit 1.

  • Page 637: Assigning A Name For Magazines And Magazine Locations

    Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface Definition of the buffer storage with allocation to the magazines: $TC_MAP1[9998]=7 $TC_MAP1[9999]=9 $TC_MAP2[9998]="Buffer1" $TC_MAP2[9999]="LOADINGMAGAZINE1" $TC_MAP3[9998]=17 $TC_MAP3[9999]=17 $TC_MAP6[9998]=1 $TC_MAP7[9999]=1 $TC_MAP7[9998]=2 $TC_MAP8[9999]=0 $TC_MAP8[9998]=0 $TC_MPP1[9999,1]=7 $TC_MPP1[9998,1]=2 $TC_MPP2[9999,1]=0 $TC_MPP2[9998,1]=0 $TC_MPP3[9999,1]=0 $TC_MPP3[9998,1]=0 $TC_MPP4[9999,1]=2 $TC_MPP4[9998,1]=2 $TC_MPP5[9998,2]=1 $TC_MDP1[1,1]=0 $TC_MDP1[2,1]=0 $TC_MPP1[9998,2]=2 $TC_MPP2[9998,2]=0 $TC_MDP2[1,1]=0 $TC_MPP3[9998,2]=0...
  • Page 638 Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface </MAGAZINE_1> </MAGAZINEPLACENAMECONFIGURATION> Name for a magazine Dedicated texts can also be allocated for magazines. The text or the text identifier is entered into the magazine configuration file (ini file) of the NC. The system variable for the magazine name is $TC_MAP2[magNo].

  • Page 639: Configuring The "Assign Tooltips For Multitool Locations" Window

    Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface 9.2.16 Configuring the "Assign Tooltips for Multitool Locations" window <MULTITOOLPLACETOOLTIPCONFIGURATION> tag You will find the entries for assigning tooltips in the tag <MULTITOOLPLACETOOLTIPCONFIGURATION>. This is particularly useful if all the multitools used on a turning machine have two locations and a fixed assignment between multitool locations and the main spindle or the counter spindle exists, for example, location 1 - main spindle location 2 - counter spindle.
  • Page 640 Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface Example <PLACETYPECONFIGURATION> <PLACETYPE1> <Text value="TM_PLACETYPE_1" type="QString" /> <Tooltip value="TM_TT_PLACETYPE_1" type="QString" /> </PLACETYPE1> <PLACETYPE2> <Text value="TM_PLACETYPE_2" type="QString" /> <Tooltip value="TM_TT_PLACETYPE_2" type="QString" /> </PLACETYPE2> <PLACETYPE3> <Text value="TM_PLACETYPE_3" type="QString" /> <Tooltip value="TM_TT_PLACETYPE_3" type="QString" /> </PLACETYPE3> </PLACETYPECONFIGURATION> See also Please refer to the following section for the procedure to create language-dependent text: Creating OEM texts (Page 288)

  • Page 641: Assignment Of Magazines And Magazine Locations To Channels

    Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface 9.2.18 Assignment of magazines and magazine locations to channels Requirement Turning technology or milling technology and technology extension turning have been set: Name of the associated configuration file sltmturninglistconfig.xml or sltmmillturnlistconfig.xml. Assignment between magazine and magazine locations and channel With this setting, magazines and magazine locations can be assigned to channels.

  • Page 642: Assignment Between Magazines And Magazine Locations And Coordinate Systems

    Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface <CHANNELMAGAZINEASSIGNMENT> <CHANNELNO_1> <Magazines value="1 2 3" type="QString" /> </CHANNELNO_1> <CHANNELNO_2> <Magazines value="4" type="QString" /> </CHANNELNO_2> <CHANNELNO_3> <Magazines value="5" type="QString" /> </CHANNELNO_3> <CHANNELNO_4> <Magazines value="6" type="QString" /> </CHANNELNO_4> </CHANNELMAGAZINEASSIGNMENT> Example 2 Magazine location 1 of the buffer will be assigned to channel 1. Magazine location 2 of the buffer will be assigned to channel 2.
  • Page 643 Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface Assignment between the magazine or magazine locations and the coordinate system With this setting, magazines and magazine locations can be assigned to coordinate systems. This is useful if the machine is configured in such a way that a magazine or magazine location does not match the position of the coordinate system set in the channel.

  • Page 644: Disabling The Softkey Depending On Filters

    Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface 9.2.20 Disabling the softkey depending on filters Tag <FILTERCONFIGURATION> in combination with Tag <SOFTKEYLOCK> Some softkeys can be hidden depending on filter settings. For example, the "New Tool" softkey is hidden if the filter "Only disabled tools" is set. This is not a good idea because the new tool is not created as a disabled tool and is thus directly filtered out of the display.

  • Page 645: Configuring The "Load Station Selection" Window

    Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface 9.2.21 Configuring the "Load Station Selection" window <LOADSTATIONSHANDLEALLTOOLS> tag For functions "Delete all," "Unload all," and "Load all," you must specify a load station if multiple load stations are configured in the magazine configuration of the NC. The load station is defined in a dialog called "Select Load Station"...
  • Page 646 Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface Up to eight M functions can be programmed for the activation or deactivation of the tool-specific functions. Definition is realized using the following machine data: MD52281 $MCS_TOOL_MCODE_FUNC_ON[0...3] M code for tool-specific function ON = - 1 MD52282 $MCS_TOOL_MCODE_FUNC_OFF[0...3] M code for tool-specific function OFF...
  • Page 647 Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface MD52282 $MCS_TOOL_MCODE_FUNC_OFF[0] = 91 MD52282 $MCS_TOOL_MCODE_FUNC_OFF[1] = - 1 MD52282 $MCS_TOOL_MCODE_FUNC_OFF[2] = 95 MD52282 $MCS_TOOL_MCODE_FUNC_OFF[3] = 97 As a result, fields 1 to 4 of the tool-specific functions are displayed in the tool list. The following fields are activated: Tool-specific function 1: Tool-specific function 2:...
  • Page 648 Own comment - entry is not displayed at the user interface. Procedure 1. You can copy the sample file "oem_slstepforms_deu.ts" from the following directory: / siemens/sinumerik/hmi/template/lng 2. Save or create the file in the /oem/sinumerik/hmi/lng or /user/sinumerik/hmi/lng directory. 3. Change the file name to "slstepforms_deu.ts".

  • Page 649: Reason For The Tool Change When Reactivating

    Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface </context </TS> 9.2.23 Reason for the tool change when reactivating Precondition Software option You require the "MC Information System TDI Statistic" option for this function Function When reactivating a tool, you have the option of specifying the reason for the tool change, e.g. to use this information for statistical purposes.
  • Page 650 Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface Parameter Designation REASONXXX XXX stands for an internal number. The numbers for the tool change reason must be clear and unique. Text Text identifier of the tool change reason. Parameter Parameter identifier of the parameter in which it is entered whether the tool change reason was selected.
  • Page 651 Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface <Text value="TM_DGL_CUTTING_EDGE_DAMAGE" type="QString" /> <Parameter value="ToolUser_1_Bit3" type="QString" /> </REASON3> <REASON4> <Text value="TM_DGL_PREMATURE_WEAR" type="QString" /> <Parameter value="ToolUser_1_Bit4" type="QString" /> </REASON4> <REASON5> <Text value="TM_DGL_TYPE_REEQUIPPING" type="QString" /> <Parameter value="ToolUser_1_Bit5" type="QString" /> </REASON5> <REASON6> <Text value="TM_DGL_TOOL_TRIAL" type="QString" /> <Parameter value="ToolUser_1_Bit6"...

  • Page 652: Configure The Code Carrier Connection

    Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface <REASON4> <Text value="TM_DGL_PREMATURE_WEAR" type="QString" /> <BitMask value="8" type="int" /> </REASON4> <REASON5> <Text value="TM_DGL_TYPE_REEQUIPPING" type="QString" /> <BitMask value="16" type="int" /> </REASON5> <REASON6> <Text value="TM_DGL_TOOL_TRIAL" type="QString" /> <BitMask value="32" type="int" /> </REASON6> <REASON7> <Text value="TM_DGL_PREVENTIVE_CHANGE" type="QString" /> <BitMask value="64"...
  • Page 653 Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface The following functions in the tool list are available: 1. Creating tools for the code carrier: Figure 9-2 New tool from code carrier The data of the tool are read from the code carrier tool and displayed in the "New Tool" window.
  • Page 654 Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface Entries Meaning UnloadWithDelete true - the tool is deleted when unloaded to the code carrier. The "On code carrier" function is not offered for "Delete tool". false - default setting, the tool is only unloaded for "unload to code carrier"...

  • Page 655: Configuring Save To File

    Tool management 9.2 Configuring the user interface 9.2.25 Configuring Save to file <SAVETOOLDATACONFIGURATION> tag The entries used for configuring the functions "Save tools to file" or "Create tools from file" are located in the <SAVETOOLDATACONFIGURATION> tag: The following functions in the tool list are available: 1.

  • Page 656: Creating Oem Texts

    Tool management 9.3 Creating OEM texts The following settings can be made: Entries Meaning Enabled true - Tool from/in file is offered. false - Tool from/in file is not offered. UnloadWithDelete true - The tool is deleted when unloaded to a file. The "In File" function is not offered for "Delete tool."...

  • Page 657: Identifiers Of The Standard Texts

    Own comments - are not displayed. Procedure 1. You can copy the sample file "oem_sltmlistdialog_eng.ts" from the following directory: / siemens/sinumerik/hmi/template/lng 2. Save the file in the /oem/sinumerik/hmi/lng or /user/sinumerik/hmi/lng directory. 3. Change the file name to "sltmlistdialog_eng.ts". If you wish to create texts for additional languages, then a separate file must be created for each language.
  • Page 658 Tool management 9.3 Creating OEM texts OEM tool parameters "ToolUser_1" to "ToolUser_10" "ToolAppl_1" to "ToolAppl_10" Text identifier of the column heading Text identifier of the tooltip TM_HL_TOOL_USER_1 to ...10 TM_TT_TOOL_USER_1 to ...10 TM_HL_TOOL_APPL_1 to ...10 TM_TT_TOOL_APPL_1 to ...10 Text identifiers in tool details Text identifiers in tool details - all parameters TM_HL_TOOL_USER_1_DETAILS to ...10_DETAILS TM_HL_TOOL_USER_1_LONG to ...10_LONG...
  • Page 659 Tool management 9.3 Creating OEM texts "MultiToolAppl_1" to "MultiToolAppl_10" Text identifier of the column heading Text identifier of the tooltip TM_HL_MULTITOOL_USER_1 to ...10 TM_TT_MULTITOOL_USER_1 to ...10 TM_HL_MULTITOOL_APPL_1 to ...10 TM_TT_MULTITOOL_APPL_1 to ...10 Text identifiers in tool details Text identifiers in tool details - all parameters TM_HL_MULTITOOL_USER_1_DETAILS to ...

  • Page 660: Examples Of Oem Texts

    Tool management 9.3 Creating OEM texts 9.3.3 Examples of OEM texts Example 1 with a single-line and double-line text <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!DOCTYPE TS><TS> <!-- ************************************************************ --> <!-- Definition of OEM texts <!-- ************************************************************ --> <context> <name>SlTmListForm</name> <!-- ************************************************************ --> <!-- enter your text behind this comment -->...
  • Page 661 Tool management 9.3 Creating OEM texts <ItemType value="CheckBox" type="QString" /> <DisplayMode value="AnyMode" type="QString" /> <BitMask value="1" type="int" /> <Width value="17" type="int" /> <HeadLine value="TM_HL_EDGE_USER_1_Bit0" type="QString" /> <ToolTip value="TM_TT_EDGE_USER_1_Bit0" type="QString" /> </EdgeUser_1_Bit0> </PARAMETERCONFIGURATION> The two texts under HeadLine and ToolTip should be output depending on the language. To do this, the two text identifiers must be included in the sltmlistdialog_xxx.ts file: <?xml version="1.0"...

  • Page 662: Examples

    Tool management 9.4 Examples Examples 9.4.1 Example: Configuring an OEM tool list 9.4.1.1 Adapting the configuration file The following excerpt shows the contents of the configuration file: ● Milling technology: sltmlistconfig.xml ● Turning technology: sltmturninglistconfig.xml The file in this example is stored in the "user/sinumerik/hmi/cfg" directory. This example describes a configuration of the OEM tool list.
  • Page 663 Tool management 9.4 Examples <!-- **** Priority tool, own parameter *** --> <!-- **** Display OEM tool parameter 2 bit 0 *** --> <Item value="PriorTool" type="QString" /> </TOOLTYPE_ALL> </COLUMN7> <!-- **** Column 8 *** --> <COLUMN8> <!-- **** For all tool types *** --> <TOOLTYPE_ALL>...

  • Page 664: Adaptation Of The Customer Text File

    Tool management 9.4 Examples 9.4.1.2 Adaptation of the customer text file The following excerpt shows the contents of the "sltmlistdialog_eng.ts" customer text file. The file in this example is stored in the "user/sinumerik/hmi/lng" directory. Example "sltmlistdialog_eng.ts" file: <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!DOCTYPE TS><TS>...
  • Page 665 Tool management 9.4 Examples </message> <!-- **** Headline for own parameter *** --> <!-- **** Priority tool *** --> <message> <source>TMO_HL_PRIOR_TOOL</source> <translation>V</translation> <remark>priority tool</remark> <chars>1</chars> <lines>2</lines> </message> <!-- **** Tooltip for own parameter *** --> <!-- **** Priority tool *** --> <message>...

  • Page 666: Example: Configuring Magazine Location Types With Names

    Tool management 9.4 Examples 9.4.2 Example: Configuring magazine location types with names 9.4.2.1 Adapting the configuration file The following excerpt shows the contents of the configuration file: ● Milling technology: sltmlistconfig.xml ● Turning technology: sltmturninglistconfig.xml The file in this example is stored in the "user/sinumerik/hmi/cfg" directory. This example describes a configuration of the location types in the magazine list.

  • Page 667: Adaptation Of The Customer Text File

    Tool management 9.4 Examples <!-- **** For all multitools *** --> <TOOLTYPE_9997> <!-- **** Display for all multitool location types *** --> <Item value="MultiToolPlaceSpecIdent" type="QString" /> </TOOLTYPE_9997> </COLUMN11> </SlTmToolmagazinForm> </LISTCONFIGURATION> <!-- **** Configuration of the magazine location types *** --> <PLACETYPECONFIGURATION>...
  • Page 668 Tool management 9.4 Examples Example "sltmlistdialog_eng.ts" file: <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!DOCTYPE TS><TS> <!-- ************************************************************** --> <!-- Definition of OEM texts --> <!-- ************************************************************** --> <context> <name>SlTmListForm</name> <!-- ************************************************************** --> <!-- Enter your text behind this comment --> <!-- ************************************************************** --> <!-- **** Magazine location type 1 item *** -->...
  • Page 669 Tool management 9.4 Examples <source>TMMP_TT_HEAVY_TOOL</source> <translation>heavy tool</translation> <chars>35</chars> <lines>2</lines> </message> <!-- **** Magazine location type 3 item *** --> <!-- **** Big tool *** --> <message> <source>TMMP_TT_BIG_TOOL</source> <translation>big</translation> <chars>9</chars> </message> <!-- **** Magazine location type 3 tooltip *** --> <!-- **** Big tool *** --> <message>...

  • Page 670: Replace T, M Or D Function

    For information about tool change cycles, see Section "Manufacturer cycle for tool change CUST_T and CUST_M6 (Page 83)". References ● SINUMERIK 828D Commissioning Manual, CNC Commissioning; Tool Management "Application example for turning machine" section "Application example for milling machine" section ●...
  • Page 671 Tool management 9.5 Replace T, M or D function System variable Meaning $C_TS_PROG Bool variable This variable indicates whether an identifier is available in $C_TS $C_TE This variable returns the address extension of the T word. $C_TCA Bool variable This variable indicates whether the TCA replacement is active $C_DUPLO_PROG Bool variable This variable indicates whether the Duplo number has been...

  • Page 672: Working With Two Toolholders

    Tool management 9.6 Working with two toolholders System variable Meaning $A_TC_LTO Target location number of the old tool (to be removed). $AC_TC_CMDT Trigger variable to output command of the NC (is set for one IPO). $AC_TC_ACKT Trigger variable for acknowledgment of the PLC (is set for one IPO).
  • Page 673 Tool management 9.6 Working with two toolholders Toolholder definition The MD52248 REV_2_BORDER_TOOL_LENGTH defines a tool length limit X so that the tools can be assigned to the two toolholders automatically: Tool length X < MD52248: Tool belongs to the 1st toolholder Tool length X ≥...
  • Page 674 Tool management 9.6 Working with two toolholders F_T_REV2 TRANSM(_NR) F_T_REV2 Note In the status display, TRANSM is now displayed instead of TRANSMIT. Additional parameter assignments For the used mirrorings of the X and Y axes and the offsets of the C axis, the following machine data has to be configured: MD24006 $MC_CHSFRAME_RESET_MASK Active system frames after RESET...

  • Page 675: Deploy Multitool

    For a detailed description of the procedure and setting options, see Section "Tool management, Configuring the user interface (Page 228)". A template for the settings is provided in the directory "/siemens/sinumerik/hmi/template/cfg" with the name "oem_sltmlistconfig.xml". To display the multitool, you must set the "DisableMultiTools“ entry to the "false“ vale in the configuration file.

  • Page 676: Loading And Unloading Multitool

    Tool management 9.7 Deploy multitool </MULTITOOLPLACETOOLTIPCONFIGURATION> </CONFIGURATION> 9.7.2 Loading and unloading multitool A multitool is loaded and unloaded into or out of the magazine just the same as loading or unloading an individual tool. Acknowledgment from the PLC and information about the multitool position Acknowledgment is realized using position value "0"...

  • Page 677: Tool Change For A Multitool

    Tool management 9.7 Deploy multitool The following table shows the task status and the preparation of the acknowledgment without the position specification for the loading. Data block Meaning Value DB4100.DBB0 Task 10000001 DB4100.DBB1 Task description 00000001 DB4100.DBW6 Source magazine number 9999 DB4100.DBW8 Source location number...
  • Page 678 Tool management 9.7 Deploy multitool location distance). The PLC program must appropriately initiate the machine so that the active tool in the multitool can do the machining. An alarm is output if the name of a multitool is programmed. Example The following table shows the task status and the preparation of the acknowledgment without the position specification for the change.

  • Page 679: Editor For The Tool And Magazine Management

    Tool management 9.8 Editor for the tool and magazine management The programming in the NC program is called: T4 MTL=1 Example The following table shows the task status and the preparation of the acknowledgment with the position specification for the change. Data block Meaning Value...

  • Page 680: Calling The Tool Management

    Tool management 9.8 Editor for the tool and magazine management General sequence The following steps are required to create a tool management: ● Create tool unit ● Define buffer locations ● Define loading location ● Create magazine configuration ● Link assignments Note When you create a new tool unit, a buffer location with a spindle location, a loading magazine with a loading location and a real magazine with five locations are created by default.

  • Page 681: Editing The Tool Management

    Tool management 9.8 Editor for the tool and magazine management Procedure Select the "Start-up" operating area. Press the "NC" and "Tool management" softkeys. The "Tool management" window opens. 9.8.3 Editing the tool management For the tree view of the tool management, functions are available with which you can parameterize magazine data items and link them with each other.
  • Page 682 Tool management 9.8 Editor for the tool and magazine management Navigate with the <Cursor right> and <Cursor down> keys to the folder element of the tool unit. Press the "New element" softkey. A folder element with the standard designation <magazine> is inserted and the "Magazine"...

  • Page 683: Parameterizing The Tool Management

    Tool management 9.8 Editor for the tool and magazine management If you want to create a tool management that is similar to an already existing element, then you can save time if you copy the existing elements and insert them at a different position. You have the option, for example of also copying inactive subtrees into the active tree.

  • Page 684: Define Buffer Locations

    Tool management 9.8 Editor for the tool and magazine management You can set the following parameters in the "TO unit" window from the tool unit directory: Parameters Description Name Designation that is displayed in the tree structure. Channel number The channel to which the tool unit is assigned. Tool search Search strategy: ●...

  • Page 685: Define Loading Location

    Tool management 9.8 Editor for the tool and magazine management Element values You can change the buffer location type with the parameters in the "Location" window: Parameters Description (Selection menu) Select a buffer type ● Tool spindle / tool holder ●...

  • Page 686: Create Magazine Configuration

    Tool management 9.8 Editor for the tool and magazine management Element values You can change the loading location type with the parameters in the "Location" window: Parameters Description (Selection menu) Select a loading location type: ● Load location Load locations are areas on the machine at which the direct loading in the magazine is possible.

  • Page 687: Link Assignments

    Tool management 9.8 Editor for the tool and magazine management Parameters Description Tool search Search strategy: ● Without search strategy ● Take from the TOA ● Active tool ● Shortest way Empty location search Search strategy: ● Without search strategy ●...
  • Page 688 Tool management 9.8 Editor for the tool and magazine management Element values You are currently located under the "Active data" → <tool unit> directory in the "Commissioning" → "NC" →"Tool management" operating area. You can link the following parameters with each other from the selection list via the Assignments element: ●...

  • Page 689: Service And Diagnostics

    Service and diagnostics 10.1 NC/PLC variables 10.1.1 Displaying and editing PLC and NC variables Changes can only be made to the NC/PLC variables with the appropriate password. WARNING Incorrect parameterization Changes in the states of NC/PLC variables have a considerable influence on the machine. Incorrect configuration of the parameters can endanger life and cause damage to the machine.
  • Page 690 Service and diagnostics 10.1 NC/PLC variables Formats Binary Hexadecimal Decimal without sign +/-D Decimal with sign Floating point (for double words) ASCII character Notation examples Permissible notation for variables: ● PLC variables: EB2, A1.2, DB2.DBW2 ● NC variables: – NC system variables: Notation $AA_IM[1] –...
  • Page 691 Service and diagnostics 10.1 NC/PLC variables Changing and deleting values Select the "Diagnostics" operating area. Press the "NC/PLC variables" softkey. - OR - Select the "Startup" operating area. Press the "PLC" and "NC/PLC variab." softkeys. The "NC/PLC Variables" window opens. Position the cursor in the "Variable"...

  • Page 692: Saving And Loading Screen Forms

    Service and diagnostics 10.1 NC/PLC variables - OR - Press the "Cancel" softkey to cancel the changes. Changing operands Depending on the type of operand, you can increment or decrement the address by 1 place at a time using the "Operand +" and "Operand -" softkeys. Note Axis names as index For axis names, the "Operand +"...

  • Page 693: Displaying The Service Overview

    Service and diagnostics 10.2 Displaying the Service overview Press the "Save screen" softkey. The "Save screen: Select archiving" window opens. Position the cursor on the template folder for variable screen forms in which your actual screen form should be saved and press the "OK" soft‐ key.

  • Page 694: Selecting Axes And Drives

    Service and diagnostics 10.2 Displaying the Service overview ● Motor temperature ● Measuring system 1 active / measuring system 2 active The states for measuring system 1/2 have the following meaning: Symbol Meaning The position measuring system is active. The position measuring system is parked. - OR: - The position measuring system is not configured.
  • Page 695 Service and diagnostics 10.2 Displaying the Service overview Selection overview The following information is provided in the selection overview. Column Description Bus No. Bus number for drives without NC assignment. No entry for NC axes. Slave address Slave address for drives without NC assignment. No entry for NC axes.

  • Page 696: Axis Diagnostics

    Service and diagnostics 10.2 Displaying the Service overview All axes/drives are selected. No axis/drive is selected. Only internal drives are selected. Only external drives are selected. Those axes are selected that are assigned to a real drive. All axes are selected, which are defined in a minimum of one channel. Press the "OK"...
  • Page 697 Service and diagnostics 10.2 Displaying the Service overview Procedure Select the "Diagnostics" operating area. Press the menu forward key. New horizontal softkeys are displayed. Press the "Axis diagnostics" softkey. The "Service Overview" window opens. Press the "Service axis" softkey. The "Service Axis/Spindle" window opens. Press the "Axis +"...
  • Page 698 Service and diagnostics 10.2 Displaying the Service overview Display data Meaning Servo gain factor (calculated) The servo gain factor in the display is calculated by the NC according to the following equation: Velocity setpoint = setpoint currently being output to the axis/spindle References: Basic Functions Function Manual;...
  • Page 699 Service and diagnostics 10.2 Displaying the Service overview Display data Meaning Spindle speed setpoint cur‐ Current active speed setpoint with correct sign, including calculated rent compensation value and any active speed limitation (specified by set‐ ting or machine data) Unit: rpm Display applies to spindles only.
  • Page 700 Service and diagnostics 10.2 Displaying the Service overview Display data Meaning Feedforward control mode Indicates whether and if so, which mode of the dynamic feedforward control for the axis is active: ● Inactive ● Velocity The velocity-dependent speed feedforward control is active. ●...

  • Page 701: Service Drive

    Service and diagnostics 10.2 Displaying the Service overview Display data Meaning "Travel to fixed stop" state Indicates whether or not the axis has fulfilled the conditions for "Fixed stop reached" when the "Travel to fixed stop" function is active (IS DB31, ...
  • Page 702 Service and diagnostics 10.2 Displaying the Service overview Press the "Drive selection" softkey. The "Drive Direct Selection:" window opens. Select the desired drive directly from the selection list. Confirm the selection with "OK." The drive data is displayed. Overview The individual status displays, warnings, messages, etc. that are displayed in the "Service Drive"...
  • Page 703 Display of communications errors detected in hardware between NC and drive. Note If the display shows a value other than "0", please contact your Siemens regional office! SC1 drive alarm message Displays (yes/no) whether messages of status class 1 are active. Status class 1 messages are alarms with the following properties: ●...
  • Page 704 Service and diagnostics 10.2 Displaying the Service overview DC-link voltage, smoothed The display of the smoothed actual value of the DC-link voltage of the selected drive corresponds to the drive parameter: r0026 "DC-link voltage smoothed". Unit: Volts Speed setpoint, smoothed The display of the smoothed speed setpoint - measured according to the setpoint limitation for the P component of the speed controller - corresponds to the drive parameter: r1438 "Speed controller speed setpoint".
  • Page 705 Service and diagnostics 10.2 Displaying the Service overview Parking axis Displays (yes/no) whether it is a parking axis/spindle. Note With parking axes/spindles, all encoder-specific monitoring and evaluation functions are switched off. This allows the encoder to be withdrawn without initiating an alarm. Specified drive data set The display (standard: DDS0) of which of the eight drive parameter sets is to be activated by the PLC corresponds to the interface signal:...
  • Page 706 Service and diagnostics 10.2 Displaying the Service overview Depending on "n", the following "values" are displayed: Display Speed control (without encoder) Speed control (with encoder) Torque control (with encoder) Position actual value measuring system 1/2 The actual position of the axis as measured via measuring system 1/2. The position is displayed in the machine coordinate system (no zero offsets or tool offsets included).
  • Page 707 Service and diagnostics 10.2 Displaying the Service overview Torque lower than threshold setting The status display of the drive as to whether the threshold torque has been undershot corresponds to the interface signal: DB390x, ... DBX4002.3 "|M | < M ".

  • Page 708: Profinet Diagnostics

    Service and diagnostics 10.3 PROFINET diagnostics Diagnostics for alarms This information is also provided as a diagnostic tool for diagnosing the causes of alarms such ● Drive fault: ⇒ SC1 drive alarm message is set. ⇒ Check specified drive data set, specified motor data set, DC-link voltage. ●...
  • Page 709 Note PROFIBUS DP connection The SINUMERIK 828D only has one integrated PROFIBUS DP. The NC communicates with the drives via this integrated PROFIBUS DP. It cannot be accessed from outside on the PPU and is therefore not described further here.
  • Page 710 References For further information about the network interface for PROFINET, please refer to: ● SINUMERIK 828D PPU Manual ● SINUMERIK 828D Commissioning CNC Commissioning Manual Procedure Select the "Diagnostics" operating area. Press the menu forward key and the "Bus TCP/IP" softkey.

  • Page 711: Displaying Details For Profinet Devices

    Note PROFIBUS DP connection The SINUMERIK 828D only has one integrated PROFIBUS DP. The NC communicates with the drives via this integrated PROFIBUS DP. It cannot be accessed from outside on the PPU and is therefore not described further here.

  • Page 712: Trace

    Service and diagnostics 10.4 Trace Procedure Select the "Diagnostics" operating area. Press the menu forward key and the "Bus TCP/IP" softkey. The "PROFINET/PROFIBUS Diagnostics" window opens. Press the "Bus -" or "Bus +" softkey to select the desired bus. Select the PROFINET device for which you want to display details. Press the "Details"...
  • Page 713 Service and diagnostics 10.4 Trace Recording fundamentals: Signals (data) Signals (data) specify what is to be recorded: ● NC variables (axis data, drive data, channel data, etc.) ● PLC data Cyclic events Interpolation clock cycle (IPO clock cycle) PLC cycle OB1 Position control clock cycle (servo clock cycle) Non-cyclic events Starting a session...

  • Page 714: Variables Filter/Search

    Service and diagnostics 10.4 Trace 10.4.1 Variables filter/search Searching for PLC/NC/servo variables To limit the selection of variables for PLC/NC/servo, set a filter and/or enter a start value for the search: Filter: Display of the following variables: System variable System variables NC variables Axis Axis variables...
  • Page 715 Service and diagnostics 10.4 Trace Procedure For a trace session, in the "Selected Variables for Trace: Session ... " window, set the variables whose signals are to be traced. In the "Select variables for trace: Session..." window, a trace session is displayed.

  • Page 716: Trace Settings

    Service and diagnostics 10.4 Trace Editing variables of a trace session Key combination Effect Ctrl + X Press the key combination or open the shortcut menu in order to cut out a variable. or right-click, shortcut menu "Cut" Ctrl + C Press the key combination or open the shortcut menu in order to copy a variable.

  • Page 717: Trace Settings (Drive)

    Service and diagnostics 10.4 Trace 10.4.2.2 Trace settings (drive) In the "Trace Settings (Drive)" window, you define the conditions for starting and stopping the trace session: Condition for Start trace With "Start trace" softkey The recording is started immediately after pressing the "Start trace"...

  • Page 718: Trace Options

    Service and diagnostics 10.4 Trace If the time has expired Defines the period which after expiry, the recording is exited. If the memory is full The recording is terminated when the specified data volume (KB) is reached. 10.4.2.3 Trace options You define the following properties of a trace session in the "Trace - Options"...

  • Page 719: Selecting Attributes Of A Variable

    Service and diagnostics 10.4 Trace Recording the trace session ● Manually starting and stopping a trace ● Starting and stopping recording using a trigger Procedure You have listed the desired variables for a trace section. Press the "Display trace" softkey. The "Trace"...
  • Page 720 Service and diagnostics 10.4 Trace Attributes Meaning Line type selection to display the characteristic graphs. ● No line ● Solid line ● Dashed line ● Dash-dot line ● Dash-dot-dot line ● Dotted line ● Stepped line XY ● Stepped line YX ●...
  • Page 721 Service and diagnostics 10.4 Trace Attributes Meaning ● Block start, type 1 or block end (all program levels, without intermediate blocks) ● Block start, type 2 or block end (all program levels, with intermediate blocks) ● Block start, type 3 or block end (all main programs, without intermediate blocks) ●...
  • Page 722 Service and diagnostics 10.4 Trace Attributes Meaning Bit mask In the case of an integer variable, a bit mask can be specified in this field. For a bit mask, the particular signal value is AND'ed before being displayed. After the mask has been applied, all of the selected bits are moved to the right so that it looks as if the bit or the bits all start with bit zero.

  • Page 723: Setting Trace Views

    Service and diagnostics 10.4 Trace 10.4.4.2 Setting trace views In order to permit a precise evaluation of the recorded signals, you have the option to edit the view as well as the display of the characteristic graphs: ● Selection/legend – Show legend: In addition to the graphic display, the data of the variable is displayed as comment, numbered and in color.

  • Page 724: Selecting A Variable

    Service and diagnostics 10.4 Trace 10.4.4.3 Selecting a variable You have the option of displaying the selected variables as legend and to make a selection using a checkbox. Legend Numbering the variables Axis identifier Comment of the variables Displaying a legend and selecting a variable A recording is opened in the "Trace"...

  • Page 725: Zooming The Display

    Service and diagnostics 10.4 Trace The "Select X-Y Scaling" input window opens and the values of the X time axis are displayed. Press the "X time axis" softkey again if you wish to hide the values. - OR - Press the "Y selected curves" softkey to display the values of the Y value axis.
  • Page 726 Service and diagnostics 10.4 Trace Press the "Adapt individually" or "Adapt all" softkey if you wish to display all selected characteristic graphs in a separate area positioned one above the other. - OR - Press the "Adapt together" softkey if you wish to adapt all of the charac‐ teristic graphs to the graphic window.

  • Page 727: Position The Cursor

    Service and diagnostics 10.4 Trace 10.4.4.6 Position the cursor Using the cursor, you have the option of determining the precise values from a defined section. To do this, the cursor is positioned directly on the curve. Procedure A recording is opened in the "Trace" graphics window. Press the "Cursor A"...

  • Page 728: Trace Session Files

    Service and diagnostics 10.4 Trace Procedure A recording is opened in the "Trace" graphics window. Press the "Point Mode" softkey to continuously move the cursor along the curve. Press the "Peak Mode" softkey to position the cursor at the highest value. Press the "Valley Mode"...

  • Page 729: Saving The Trace File

    Service and diagnostics 10.4 Trace 10.4.5.2 Saving the trace file There are two options of saving a trace session: ● Variables and settings: Only the variables and the settings are saved. ● Variables, settings and recorded values: The variables, settings and the recorded values are saved.

  • Page 730: Load Trace Session File

    Service and diagnostics 10.4 Trace - OR - If the session file with this name already exists, then you obtain a corre‐ sponding confirmation prompt. 10.4.5.3 Load trace session file You have the option of loading already saved session data, to restart them or to display the trace that has been recorded.

  • Page 731: Drive System

    Service and diagnostics 10.5 Drive system 10.5 Drive system 10.5.1 Displaying drive states Status display The "Drive System Diagnostics" window displays the status information about the drive units and the associated drive objects. The status symbols have the following meaning: Display icon Meaning Green...

  • Page 732: Displaying Details Of The Drive Objects

    Service and diagnostics 10.5 Drive system 10.5.2 Displaying details of the drive objects Drive system diagnostics - details The following information is displayed for the drive objects: ● Status display (r0002) – The status display (parameter r0002) of the drive object is displayed. ●...

  • Page 733: Action Log

    Service and diagnostics 10.6 Action log Display icon Meaning Gray The drive status could not be determined for this drive object. Special characters Error when reading the data. Procedure Select the "Diagnostics" operating area. Press the menu forward key and the "Drive system" softkey. The "Drive System Diagnostics"...
  • Page 734 Service and diagnostics 10.6 Action log Data that can be logged Logging on Logging is activated or deactivated. Alarm status change Incoming and outgoing alarms are logged. Keyboard actions All actions on the operator panel front and on an external keyboard are logged.

  • Page 735: Displaying The Log File

    Service and diagnostics 10.6 Action log Procedure Select the "Start-up" operating area. Press the "HMI", "Diagnostics", and "Action log" softkeys The "Action Log Settings" window opens. Activate the "Logging on" checkbox to activate the action log. Activate the relevant checkbox if you want to acquire particular events in the action log.

  • Page 736: Searching In The Log Files

    Service and diagnostics 10.6 Action log Select the desired com file and press the "Open" softkey or double-click the file. Press the "Display new" softkey to update the display of events in the log (actual_actionlog.com). The entries made since the log file was called up are displayed. 10.6.3 Searching in the log files You can search for specific events in the log.

  • Page 737: Structure Of A Log File

    Service and diagnostics 10.6 Action log The following logs are generated: ● action.com (binary file) ● action.log (ASCII file) ● crash.com (binary file) ● crash.log (ASCII file) Requirement The relevant log file is open. Procedure Press the "Save log" softkey. The log is stored in the "HMI data/Logs/Alarm logs"...
  • Page 738 IPO trace. Example Note DB19.DBW24 interface signal The DB19.DBW24 interface signal used in the example does not apply to the SINUMERIK 840D sl. It is DB1900.DBW4 for the SINUMERIK 828D. WRITE_VAR 18.02.2009 09:40:12 ncu1.local wrote variable: DB19.DBW24 = 0 KEY_PRESSED 18.02.2009...

  • Page 739: Advanced Settings

    Service and diagnostics 10.6 Action log Alarm display ALARM Date/time Deletion criterion Text DETAILS Entry Description ALARM Type of alarm: ALARM_ON, ALARM_OFF, ALARM_ACK Date/time Data and time of the event Alarm number Deletion criterion: Information as to how the alarm was acknowledged AUTOMATIC Automatic acknowledgement POWER ON...

  • Page 740: Hmi Trace

    Service and diagnostics 10.7 HMI trace Procedure 1. You can copy a sample configuration file "actlog.ini" from the following directory: /siemens/ sinumerik/hmi/template/cfg. 2. Save or create the file in the /oem/sinumerik/hmi/cfg or /user/sinumerik/hmi/cfg directory. 3. Open the file and after "; ActionLogSize=", enter the file size (in bytes).
  • Page 741 Service and diagnostics 10.7 HMI trace 4. Start the trace by activating the checkbox or from any place on the user interface with the following key combination: <Alt> + <T> on the operator panel <Alt> + <Shift> + <T> on an external keyboard The following icon is displayed at the top right in the header to show that a trace is active: 5.
  • Page 742 Service and diagnostics 10.7 HMI trace SINUMERIK Operate Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 743: Appendix

    Appendix Information about third-party software used Copyright 1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc. Printed in the United States of America. All Rights Reserved. This software product (LICENSED PRODUCT), implementing the Object Management Group's "Internet Inter-ORB Protocol", is protected by copyright and is distributed under the following license restricting its use.

  • Page 744: Abbreviations

    Appendix A.2 Abbreviations SunSoft, Inc. 2550 Garcia Avenue Mountain View, California 94043 Copyright (c) 1991 by AT&T. Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose without fee is hereby granted, provided that this entire notice is included in all copies of any software which is or includes a copy or modification of this software and in all copies of the supporting documentation for such software.
  • Page 745 Appendix A.2 Abbreviations Abbreviation Meaning FIFO First In - First Out: Method of storing/retrieving data in/from a memory. GDIR Global Directory: Global part program memory Global User Data: Global user data Main Spindle Drive High Speed Cutting: High-speed machining Increment: Incremental dimension Initializing Data: Initializing data Internet Protocol Interpolator...
  • Page 746 Appendix A.2 Abbreviations Abbreviation Meaning Setting Data Active: Identifier (file type) for setting data Softkey Server Message Block SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol Sub Program File: Subroutines SRAM Static Random Access Memory: Static RAM (non-volatile) Secure Shell: Network protocol Software System Files: System files Thin Client Unit Testing Data Active: Identifier for machine data...

  • Page 747: Index

    Index Coolant Assigning, 277 Identifier, 291 Coordinate system 3D simulation, 65, 69 MD52000, 76 crash.com, 369 crash.log, 369 CUST_800.SPF, 81 Access levels, 9 CUST_832.SPF, 81, 168 Access right CUST_CLAMP, 81 Effect, 12 CUST_M6, 81, 83 Global, 11 CUST_MEACYC individual, 11 Structogram, 175 Remote access, 11 CUST_MEACYC.SPF, 81...
  • Page 748 Index Cylindrical grinding, 134 Generating a crashlog file, 366 Displaying softkeys, 75 Grinding parameters Identifiers, 245 Date Selecting the format, 16 High-Speed Settings, 167 Setting, 17 Hirth gearing, 137 DHCP server detection, 44 HMI trace, 372 Diagnostics HOLES2, 96 Ethernet/PROFINET network, 44 HMI trace, 372 Direction of rotation Counterspindle, 112...
  • Page 749 Index Log file Action log, 369 Offset Configuring, 63 Machine data Operating state, 325 Configuring plain texts, 27 Machine function, defining texts, 279 Machine operating area, 49 Machining time recording Password Activating, 63 Changing, 10 Magazine location adapter parameters Delete, 10 Identifiers, 247 Set, 10 Magazine location parameters...
  • Page 750 Index ShopMill Settings for milling, 97 Tool-specific functions, 277 ShopTurn Tailstock Setting up a counterspindle, 111 Option, 69 Settings for turning, 106 Tapping, 80 Simulation TEACH IN, 56 Deactivate, 68 Technology General conditions, 65 Cylindrical grinding, 134 Grinding technology, 67 Drilling, 79 Milling technology, 67 Milling, 95...
  • Page 751 Index Tool parameters Transformation Identifiers, 240 Settings for milling, 101 OEM identifier, 290 TRANSMIT Tool types in turning, 125 Drill, 253 with Y axis, 126 Grinding tools, 253 TRANSMIT command, 305 Milling tool, 253 Turning Special tools, 254 Cylinder surface transformation, 122 Turning tools, 254 Displaying softkeys, 75 Toolholder, 305...
  • Page 752 Index SINUMERIK Operate Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 753 Generating user dialogs Generating commissioning dialogs SINUMERIK SINUMERIK 828D Easy XML Programming Manual Valid for: CNC software Version 4.7 SP2 10/2015 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 754 Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems.
  • Page 755 Table of contents Generating user dialogs..........................5 Scope of functions........................5 Fundamentals of Configuration....................7 Configuration files........................9 Structure of configuration file....................12 Language dependency......................14 XML identifier.........................14 1.6.1 General structure........................14 1.6.2 Instruction/identifier descriptions....................15 1.6.3 Color coding...........................42 1.6.4 Special XML syntax........................42 1.6.5 Operators..........................43 1.6.6 Generating softkey menus and dialog forms................44 Generating user menus......................71 1.7.1 Creating processing cycle forms....................71...
  • Page 756 Table of contents 2.6.8 SOFTKEY_OK, SOFTKEY_CANCEL..................136 Index.................................139 Easy XML Programming Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 757: Generating User Dialogs

    Generating user dialogs Scope of functions Overview The "Generate user dialogs" function offers an open structure and enables the user to develop customer-specific and application-specific user interfaces in SINUMERIK Operate. The control system offers an XML-based script language for generating user dialogs. This script language makes it possible to display machine-specific menus and dialog forms in the <CUSTOM>...
  • Page 758 Generating user dialogs 1.1 Scope of functions 6. Variables – Read (NC, PLC and user variables) – Write (NC, PLC and user variables) – Combine with mathematical, comparison or logic operators 7. Execute functions: – Subprograms – File functions – PI services 8.

  • Page 759: Fundamentals Of Configuration

    Generating user dialogs 1.2 Fundamentals of Configuration Fundamentals of Configuration Configuration files The defining data for new user interfaces are stored in configuration files. These files are automatically interpreted and the result displayed on the screen. Configuration files are not stored in the software supplied and must first be set up and loaded by the user.
  • Page 760 Generating user dialogs 1.2 Fundamentals of Configuration Figure 1-2 Manufacturer's folder The following files in the manufacturer's folder "System CF-Card/oem/sinumerik/hmi" on the control are needed to configure user dialogs: Table 1-1 Files for configuration File type Name of the file Description Storage location in operating area Set‐...

  • Page 761: Configuration Files

    Generating user dialogs 1.3 Configuration files Configuration files Introduction The figure below shows the manufacturer’s folder "System CF-Card/oem/sinumerik/hmi" on the control. Figure 1-3 Manufacturer's folder The following files in the manufacturer's folder "System CF-Card/oem/sinumerik/hmi" on the control are needed to configure user dialogs: Table 1-2 Files for configuration File type...
  • Page 762 Generating user dialogs 1.3 Configuration files File type Name of the file Meaning Storage location in operating area Setup > System data Bitmaps The control system supports Manufacturer's folder > sub‐ BMP and PNG formats. directory "ico" The bitmaps are saved in the subdirectory for the screen resolution belonging to the control.
  • Page 763 Generating user dialogs 1.3 Configuration files Load configuration As described in the "Storage location in the operating area" column in the previous "Files for configuration" table, the generated files must be copied to the appropriate subdirectories in the manufacturer's folder. Note As soon as there is a script file "xmldial.xml"...

  • Page 764: Structure Of Configuration File

    Generating user dialogs 1.4 Structure of configuration file Structure of configuration file Overview A configuration file consists of the following elements: ● Description of the "main" start menu with start softkeys ● Definition of dialogs ● Definition of variables ● Description of the blocks ●...
  • Page 765 Generating user dialogs 1.4 Structure of configuration file Figure 1-6 XML script and dialog forms with parameters Easy XML Programming Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 766: Language Dependency

    Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Language dependency Language-dependent texts are used for: ● Softkey labels ● Headers ● Help texts ● Any other texts The language-dependent texts are stored in text files. Note You will need to perform the following steps when using these text files: ●...

  • Page 767: Instruction/Identifier Descriptions

    Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Instructions The language offers the following instructions for executing conditional instructions and loop controls: ● For loop ● While loop ● Do with loop ● Conditional processing ● Switch and case instructions ● Operator controls in a dialog form ●...
  • Page 768 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning BREAK Conditional cancellation of a loop. CONTROL Changing the control after creation A control tag changes the properties of an existing control after it has been created. The tag must be specified with the name of the control to be changed and the new properties. It can be executed only within a form tag.
  • Page 769 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning CONTROL_RESET The tag enables one or more control components to be restarted. Syntax: <CONTROL_RESET resetnc="TRUE" /> Attributes: ● RESETNC = "TRUE" The NC component is restarted. ● RESETDRIVE = "TRUE" The drive components are restarted. Easy XML Programming Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 770 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning CREATE_CYCLE_EVENT If the parser starts to process the tag CREATE_CYCLE, initially, the message <CRE‐ ATE_CYCLE_EVENT sent> is sent to the active form. This message can be used for pre‐ paring the cycle parameters, before the parser generates the NC operation from the pa‐ rameter list and the generation rule.
  • Page 771 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning DATA The tag enables the NC, PLC, GUD and drive data to be directly written to. The "Component addressing" (Page 74) section contains details on address formation. Attribute: ● name Variable address Tag value: All alphanumeric terms are approved as tag values.
  • Page 772 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning DO_WHILE Do while loop Instructions WHILE (Test) Syntax: <DO_WHILE> Instructions … <CONDITION>…</CONDITION> </DO_WHILE> The Do While loop comprises a block of instructions and a condition. The code in the in‐ struction block is executed first, then the condition is applied. If the condition is true, the function executes the code section again.
  • Page 773 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning For loop for (initialization; test; continuation) instruction(s) Syntax: <FOR> <INIT>…</INIT> <CONDITION>…</CONDITION> <INCREMENT>…</INCREMENT> Instructions … </FOR> The For loop is executed as follows: 1. Evaluation of the expression initialization (INIT). 2. Evaluation of the expression test (CONDITION) as a Boolean expression. If the value is false, the For loop is exited.
  • Page 774 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning FORM The tag contains the description of a user dialog. The relevant tags are described in the section on generating menus and dialog forms. Syntax: <FORM name="<dialog name>" color="#ff0000"> Attributes: ● color Background color of the dialog form (color coding, see Chapter Color coding (Page 42)) –...
  • Page 775 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning Conditional instruction (IF, THEN, ELSE) The THEN and ELSE tags are enclosed in the IF tag. The condition that is executed in the CONDITION tag follows the IF tag. The further pro‐ cessing of the instructions depends upon the result of the operation.
  • Page 776 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning The instruction creates a local variable under the specified name. Fields: Using the attribute dim (dimension) single or two-dimensional fields can be created. The field index addresses the individual field elements. For a two-dimensional field, initially the line index is specified and then the column index.
  • Page 777 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning LET Continued Example: One-dimensional field: <let name="array" dim="10"></let> Two-dimensional field: <let name="list_string" dim="10,3" type="string"></let> Pre-assignment: A variable can be initialized with a value. <LET name = "VAR1" type = "INT"> 10 </LET> If values comprising NC or PLC variables are saved in a local variable, the assignment operation automatically adapts the format to that of the variables which have been loaded.
  • Page 778 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning LET Continued Variable type struct: This variable type contains a composition of variables that can be addressed using the structure name. A structure can contain all variable types and structures. Within the structure, a variable is declared with the "element" tag. The attributes of the tags and the initialization correspond to the attributes and initialization of the let instruction.
  • Page 779 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning LET Continued Access to a variable of the structure is via the structure name and variable name. Both names are separated by a point operator. <op> Structure_name.variable_name = value; </op> Example: <let name="info"...
  • Page 780 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning MSGBOX The instruction opens a message box whose return value can be used for branching. Syntax: <MSGBOX text="<Message>" caption="<caption>" retvalue="<variable name>" type="<button type>" /> Attributes: ● text Text ● caption Header ●...
  • Page 781 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning The tag executes the specified operations. The operations listed in Chapter "Operators (Page 43)" can be executed. For the purpose of accessing the NC, PLC, and drive data, the complete variable name should be placed in quotation marks.
  • Page 782 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning OPERATION Operation Instructions can be moved within an equation. Move left "<<" operator The << function moves bits to the left. You can specify the value and the number of move increments directly or with a variable.
  • Page 783 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning PRINT The tag outputs a text in the dialog line or copies the text to the variable specified. If the text contains formatting identifiers, the variable values are inserted at the appropriate places.
  • Page 784 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning PRINT Continued Values: Number of variables whose values are to be inserted into the text. The variable types must match the corresponding type identifier for the formatting instruction and must be separated from one another with a comma. Example: Output of a text in the information line <PRINT text="Infotext"...
  • Page 785 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning SEND_MESSAGE The tag sends a message with two parameters to the active form, which is processed in the tag message. Syntax: <SEND_MESSAGE>p1, p2</SEND_MESSAGE> Example: <SOFTKEY POSITION="3"> <caption>Set%nParameter</caption> <send_message>1, 0</send_message> </SOFTKEY> <FORM> …...
  • Page 786 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning SLEEP The tag interrupts script execution for the specified period. The interruption time is obtained from the transferred value multiplied by the time base of 50 ms. Syntax: <SLEEP value="Interruption time" /> Example: Wait time, 1.5 sec.
  • Page 787 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning SWITCHTOAREA The SWITCHTOAREA tag changes from the Customer area into the specified operating area. The parameter is specified as an attribute value. Syntax: <switchToArea name="area" args="argument "/> Attributes: name The following names are declared for the operating areas: ●...
  • Page 788 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning TYPEDEF A new identifier for a data type can be defined with the “typedef” tag. This has the benefit for the structure definitions that the data type can be defined once and then used as a data type in a LET instruction.
  • Page 789 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning TYPEDEF Continued Some predefined functions expect variables of structure type RECT, POINT, or SIZE as the call parameter. These structures are defined in the file struct_def.xml. RECT: <typedef name="StructRect" type="struct" > <element name="left"...
  • Page 790 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning WHILE WHILE loop WHILE (Test) Instruction Syntax: <WHILE> <CONDITION>…</CONDITION> Instructions … </WHILE> The While loop executes a sequence of instructions repeatedly while a condition is met. This condition is tested before the sequence of instructions is executed. Example: <WHILE>...
  • Page 791 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning XML_PARSER The “XML_PARSER” tag can be used to parse XML files. The parser interprets an XML file and calls defined call-back functions. Each call-back func‐ tion belongs to a predefined event. The programmer can process the XML data within this function.
  • Page 792 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning XML_PARSER Continued The parser also supplies variables so that the call-back functions can access the event data. startElementHandler: Function parameters tag_name - tag name - number of attributes found System variables $xmlAttribute String array that contains the 0-num attribute name range.
  • Page 793 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning XML_PARSER Continued charactersHandler: System variables $xmlCharacters String with data $xmlCharactersStart Always 0 $xmlCharactersLength Number of bytes Example: <function_body name="charactersHandler" return="true" > <print text="chars %s"> $xmlCharacters </print> </function_body> documentHandler: Function parameters state 1 start document, 2 end document errorHandler: System variables...

  • Page 794: Color Coding

    Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier 1.6.3 Color coding The color attribute uses the color coding scheme for the HTML language. In terms of syntax, color specifications consist of the "#" (hash) character and six digits from the hexadecimal system, with each color represented by two digits. R –...

  • Page 795: Operators

    Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier 1.6.5 Operators The operation instruction processes the following operators: Operator Meaning Assignment Equal to <, &lt; Less than >, &gt; Greater than <=, &lt;= Less than or equal to >=, &gt;= Greater than or equal to OR operation in bits Logic OR operation &, &amp;...

  • Page 796: Generating Softkey Menus And Dialog Forms

    Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier 1.6.6 Generating softkey menus and dialog forms User menus can only be inserted if there is a main-menu tag with the name "main" in the XML description. This tag is called by the system after the <CUSTOM> operating area has been activated.
  • Page 797 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning FORM This tag contains the description of a user dialog. Attributes: ● color Background color of the dialog box (for color coding, see Chapter "Color coding (Page 42)") ● name Identifier of the form ●...
  • Page 798 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning FORM continued FORM continued Syntax: <FORM name = "<dialog name>" color = "#ff0000"> Example: <FORM name = "R-Parameter"> <INIT> <DATA_ACCESS type = "true" /> <CAPTION>R - Parameter</CAPTION> <CONTROL name = "edit1" xpos = "322" ypos = "34" refvar = "nck/ Channel/Parameter/R[1]"...
  • Page 799 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning INIT Dialog box message The tag is executed immediately after the dialog box is generated. All the input elements and hotlinks for the dialog form should be created here. KEY_EVENT Dialog message The tag KEY_EVENT can be integrated in the form to evaluate keyboard events.
  • Page 800 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning MOUSE_EVENT The tag can be linked into the script for processing mouse events. It is executed when the following activities have been performed with the mouse: ● A button has been pressed ●...
  • Page 801 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning MESSAGE Dialog message If the Send_message operation is executed in the script, then the parser processes the tag message. Values P1 and P2 are provided in the variables $message_par1 and $mes‐ sage_par2 (see the "SEND_MESSAGE"...
  • Page 802 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning SEND_MESSAGE The tag sends a message with two parameters to the active form, which is processed in the tag message (see also MESSAGE). Syntax: <SEND_MESSAGE>p1, p2</SEND_MESSAGE> Example: <LET name="user_selection" /> <SOFTKEY POSITION="3"> <CAPTION>Set%nParameter</CAPTION>...
  • Page 803 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning RESIZE Dialog box message The tag can be linked into the script for processing a RESIZE event. This event is created by a dynamic resolution switchover. Easy XML Programming Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 804 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning RESIZE Continued Example: <let name="screen_size" type="StructSize" /> <form name="menu_userscale_form" autoscale_content="off"> <init> <caption>Use auto scaling</caption> <function name="hmi.get_hmi_resolution">screen_size</function> <print text="screen size: w %d h: %d">screen_size.width, screen_size.height</print> <data_access type="true" /> <control name="s_c" xpos="8" ypos="140" fieldtype="readonly" width="500"...
  • Page 805 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning FOCUS_IN Dialog box message The tag is called if the system places the focus on a control. To identify the control, the system copies the name of the control into variable $focus_name and the value of the attribute item_data into variable $focus_item_data.
  • Page 806 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning CLOSE_FORM The tag closes the active dialog. This instruction is only necessary if the dialog is opened by the MMC command and the user is offered a softkey function to close the dialog. Generally, dialogs are automatically managed and do not have to be explicitly closed.
  • Page 807 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning CONTROL Continued ● fieldtype – graphicbox The field type generates a 2D broken line graphic control. Using the tag <ITEM> a graphical element can be inserted into the control. Parameters width and height specify the width and height of the box.
  • Page 808 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning CONTROL continued ● fieldtype – listbox The field type generates an empty list box control. Using the tag <ITEM> a list box element can be inserted in the list box. The ITEM attribute value allows this element to be assigned a unique value. For example, this can be used to identify the element.
  • Page 809 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning CONTROL continued Example: <CONTROL name = "button1" xpos = "10" ypos = "10" fieldtype = " combobox "> <ITEM>text1</ITEM> <ITEM>text2</ITEM> <ITEM>text3</ITEM> <ITEM>text4</ITEM> </CONTROL> If any integer value is to be assigned to an expression, the attribute value = "value" should be added to the tag.
  • Page 810 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning CONTROL Continued The image box control manages a picture in bitmap or GIF format. If the picture is larger than the displayable area, the control will show a scroll bar. To control the visible area, the system provides the function CONTROL.IMAGEBOXSET (see Chapter "Predefined functions (Page 81)").
  • Page 811 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning EDIT_CHANGED Dialog box message This tag is called if the contents of an edit control have changed. To identify the control, the system copies the name of the control into variable $focus_name and the value of the attribute item_data into variable $focus_item_data.
  • Page 812 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning NAVIGATION This tag defines the menu to be called. It can be used within a softkey block, a menu block, and in a form. If a variable name is assigned to the tag as its value, the parser will activate the menu stored in the variable.
  • Page 813 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning PROPERTY This tag can be used to define additional properties for an operator control. Attributes: ● max = "<maximum value>" ● min = "<minimum value>" ● default = "<pre-assignment>" ● factor = "conversion factor" ●...
  • Page 814 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning SOFTKEY The tag defines the properties and responses of a softkey. Attributes: ● position Number of the softkey. 1-8 horizontal softkeys, 9-16 vertical softkeys The following attributes become effective from: ● type Defines the property of the softkey.
  • Page 815 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning – disabled The softkey is locked and is displayed in gray. ● navigation ● update_controls ● function SOFTKEY continued Syntax: Standard softkey: <state type="<softkey state>" /> <softkey position = "<1>"> … …...
  • Page 816 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning SOFTKEY continued Example: <let name="curr_softkey_state" type="string">PRESSED</let> </softkey> <softkey POSITION="3" type="toggle_softkey" refvar="curr_softkey_state"> <caption>Toggle%nSK</caption> … </softkey> SOFTKEY_OK The tag defines the response of the softkey "OK". The following additional actions can be defined within the softkey block: ●...
  • Page 817 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning SOFTKEY_BACK The tag defines the response of the softkey "Back". The following additional actions can be defined within the softkey block: ● navigation ● update_controls ● function Syntax: <SOFTKEY_BACK> … … </SOFTKEY_BACK>...
  • Page 818 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning The tag is used to display an image in the specified position. The BMP and PNG image formats are supported. Syntax: <IMG xpos = "<X position>" ypos = "<Y position>" name = "<name>" /> <IMG …...
  • Page 819 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning The tag draws a rectangle at the specified position, colored as indicated. Syntax: <BOX xpos = "<X position>" ypos = "<Y position>" width = "<X extension>" height = "<Y extension>" color = "<Color code>" /> Attributes: ●...
  • Page 820 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning FUNCTION_BODY Function body The tag contains the function body of a subfunction. The function body needs to be program‐ med within the DialogGui tag. Attributes: ● name = "Name of the function body" ●...
  • Page 821 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning FUNCTION_BODY contin‐ Example: <function_body name = "test" parameter = "c1,c2,c3" return = "true"> <LET name = "tmp">0</LET> <OP> tmp = c1+c2+c3 </OP> <OP> $return = tmp </OP> </function_body> … … … <LET name = "my_var">...
  • Page 822 Generating user dialogs 1.6 XML identifier Tag identifier Meaning REQUEST The tag is used to add a variable to the cyclic reading service (hotlink). As a consequence, the access time to variables, which are not linked to the control, is reduced. If a function is to be called automatically when a value changes, then the name of the function should be specified as an additional attribute.

  • Page 823: Generating User Menus

    Generating user dialogs 1.7 Generating user menus Generating user menus 1.7.1 Creating processing cycle forms The cycle support function allows the automatic creation and decompilation of a cycle call through the form dialog. To manage this functionality, the following tags are available: ●...
  • Page 824 Generating user dialogs 1.7 Generating user menus This is then copied to the specified variable. Tag identifier Description NC_INSTRUCTION This tag is used to define the NC instruction to be generated. All listed cycle parameters are automatically created as string variables of the FORM and are available to the FORM.
  • Page 825 Generating user dialogs 1.7 Generating user menus Tag identifier Description CREATE_CYCLE The tag generates an NC block, whose syntax is defined by the value of the NC_IN‐ STRUCTION tag. Before generating the NC instruction, the parser calls the CYCLE_CRE‐ ATE_EVENT tag of the FORM. This tag can be used to calculate the cycle param‐ eters.

  • Page 826: Substitution Characters

    Generating user dialogs 1.8 Addressing components 1.7.2 Substitution characters The system offers the option of defining control properties (attribute values) for the runtime. In order to use this function, the desired property must be set in a local variable and the variable name must be transferred to the tag as an attribute value preceded by the character $.
  • Page 827 Generating user dialogs 1.8 Addressing components DBx.DBXx.b Data block Ix.b Input Qx.b Output Mx.b Bit memory Vx.b Variable Table 1-4 Data format f: Byte Word Double word Data format identification is not applicable to bit addressing. Address x: Valid S7-200 address identifier Bit addressing: b –...

  • Page 828: Addressing Nc Variables

    Generating user dialogs 1.8 Addressing components 1.8.2 Addressing NC variables Addressing the NC variables starts with the path section nck. This section is followed by the data address; its structure should be taken from the List Manual NC Variables and Interface Signals. Example: <LET name = "tempStatus"></LET>...
  • Page 829 Generating user dialogs 1.8 Addressing components <!— Reading of value r0002 on NX1 -> <OP> r0002_content = "drive/cu/r0002[CU2]" </OP> <!— Reading of value p107[0] on the CU -> <OP> p107_content = "drive/cu/p107[0]" </OP> <PRINT text="%d"> p107_content </PRINT> <!— Reading of value p107[0] on the CU -> <OP>...
  • Page 830 Generating user dialogs 1.8 Addressing components Figure 1-8 Drive parameter p0978 [ ...] at the control Parameter number[do<DO-index>] Example: p0092[do1] Alternatively, the drive index can be read from a local variable using $<variable name> "substitution characters". z.B. DO$local variable Example: <DATA name ="drive/cu/p0092">1</DATA>...

  • Page 831: Addressing Machine And Setting Data

    Generating user dialogs 1.8 Addressing components 1.8.5 Addressing machine and setting data Drive and setting data is identified by the character $ followed by the name of the data. Machine data: $Mx_<name[index, AX<axis_number>]> Setting data: $Sx_<name[index, AX<axis_number>]> N – General machine or setting data C –...

  • Page 832: Addressing User Data

    Addressing starts with the path section gud, followed by the specification of the area CHANNEL. This address section is followed by the specification of the GUD areas: GUD areas Assignment sgud Siemens GUD mgud Machine manufacturer GUD ugud User GUD Then enter the GUD name.

  • Page 833: Predefined Functions

    Generating user dialogs 1.9 Predefined functions Predefined functions The script language offers various string processing and standard mathematical functions. The function names listed below are reserved and cannot be overloaded. Function name Description Ncfunc cap read The function copies a value from the specified address into a local variable.
  • Page 834 Generating user dialogs 1.9 Predefined functions Function name Description Ncfunc PI-Service Jobs can be transferred to the NCK using the program invocation (PI) service. If the service has been executed error-free, the function returns the value 1 in the return variable. Manipulation of the tool list _N_CREATO - Create tool _N_DELETO - Delete tool...
  • Page 835 Generating user dialogs 1.9 Predefined functions Function name Description Ncfunc PI-Service Continued Arguments: ● _N_CREATO var1 - Tool number ● _N_DELETO var1 - Tool number ● _N_CREACE var1 - Tool number var2 - Cutting edge number ● _N_DELECE var1 - Tool number var2 - Cutting edge number ●...
  • Page 836 Generating user dialogs 1.9 Predefined functions Function name Description ncfunc chan PI-Service The function executes a PI service in a channel-related manner. The channel number is passed after the PI service name. This is followed by all other call parameters. Parameters: channel - Channel number Syntax:...
  • Page 837 Generating user dialogs 1.9 Predefined functions Function name Description Ncfunc bico to int The function converts a string specified in BICO format into an integer value. (see SINAMICS) Syntax: <function name="ncfunc.bicotoint" return="integer variable">bico-string</function> Example: <let name="s_np0480_0" type="string"></let> <let name="i_p0480_0">0</let> <function name="ncfunc.bicotoint" return="i_p0480_0">s_np0480_0</function>...
  • Page 838 Generating user dialogs 1.9 Predefined functions Function name Description Ncfunc password This function sets or deletes a password level. ● Set password: The password should be specified for the required password level as parameter. ● Delete password: A blank string deletes the password level. Syntax: <function name="ncfunc.password">password </function>...
  • Page 839 Generating user dialogs 1.9 Predefined functions Function name Description Control local time The function copies the local time in a field with 7 array elements. The name of the variable is expected as call parameter. The following is stored in an array element: ●...
  • Page 840 Generating user dialogs 1.9 Predefined functions Function name Description String to compare Two strings are compared with one another from a lexicographical perspective. The function gives a return value of zero if the strings are the same, a value less than zero if the first string is smaller than the second string or a value greater than zero if the second string is smaller then the first string.
  • Page 841 Generating user dialogs 1.9 Predefined functions Function name Description String to compare without making a distinction be‐ Two strings are compared from a lexicographical perspective (the tween uppercase/lowercase comparison is not case-sensitive). The function gives a return value of zero if the strings are the same, a value less than zero if the first string is smaller than the second string or a value greater than zero if the second string is smaller then the first string.
  • Page 842 Generating user dialogs 1.9 Predefined functions Function name Description String right The function extracts the last nCount character from string 1 and cop‐ ies this to the return variable. Parameter: str1 - string nCount - number of characters Syntax: <function name="string.right" return="<result string>">...
  • Page 843 Generating user dialogs 1.9 Predefined functions Function name Description String length The function gives the number of characters in a string. Parameter: str1 - string Syntax: <function name="string.length" return="<int var>"> str1 </function> Example: <let name="length">0</let> <let name="str1" type="string">A brown bear hunts a brown dog.</let>...
  • Page 844 Generating user dialogs 1.9 Predefined functions Function name Description Strings to remove The function removes all the substrings found. Parameter: string - string variable remove string - substring to be deleted Syntax: <function name="string.remove"> string, remove string </function> Example: <let name="index">0</let> <let name="str1"...
  • Page 845 Generating user dialogs 1.9 Predefined functions Function name Description String delete The function deletes the defined number of characters starting from the start position specified. Parameter: string - string variable start index - start index (zero based) nCount - number of characters to be deleted Syntax: <function name="string.delete">...
  • Page 846 Generating user dialogs 1.9 Predefined functions Function name Description String reverse find The function searches the transferred string for the last match with the substring. If the substring is found, the function provides the index to the first character (starting with zero) or, failing this, -1. Parameter: string - string variable find string - string to be found...
  • Page 847 Generating user dialogs 1.9 Predefined functions Function name Description String trim right The function trims the closing characters from a string. Parameter: str1 - string variable Syntax: <function name="string.trimright" > str1 </ function> Example: <let name="str1" type="string"> test trim right </let>...
  • Page 848 Generating user dialogs 1.9 Predefined functions Function name Description Tangent The function calculates the tangent of the value transferred in degrees. Parameter: double - angle Syntax: <function name="tan" return="<double val>"> double </function> Example: <let name= "tan_val" type="double"></let> <function name="tan" return="tan_val"> 20.0 </ function>...
  • Page 849 Generating user dialogs 1.9 Predefined functions Function name Description ARCTAN The function calculates the arctan of the value transferred in degrees. Parameter: double - arctan of y/x Syntax: <function name="arctan" return="<double val>"> double </function> Example: <let name= "arctan_val" type="double"></let> <function name="arctan" return="arctan_val"> 20.0 </function>...
  • Page 850 Generating user dialogs 1.9 Predefined functions Function name Description Reading a file The function reads the contents of the specified file into a string varia‐ ble. The number of characters to be read can optionally be specified as a second parameter. Attribute: return - name of the local variable Parameter:...
  • Page 851 Generating user dialogs 1.9 Predefined functions Function name Description Writing to a file The function writes the contents of a string variable to the file specified. Parameter: progname - file name str1 - string Syntax: <function name="doc.writetofile" > progname, str1 </function>...
  • Page 852 Generating user dialogs 1.9 Predefined functions Function name Description Extracting script parts The function copies a dialog description embedded in a part program into the specified local variable. The call parameters to be specified are the program name, the dialog name, and a variable for storing the main menu name.
  • Page 853 Generating user dialogs 1.9 Predefined functions Function name Description Exist If the file exists, the function returns the value 1. Parameter: progname - file name Syntax: <function name="doc.exist" return="<int_var>" > progname </function> Example: <let name ="exist">0</let> NC file system <function name="doc.exist" return="exist">_T"n:\mpf \test.mpf"...
  • Page 854 Generating user dialogs 1.9 Predefined functions Function name Description Setting an individual bit The function is used to manipulate individual bits of the specified var‐ iables. The bits can either be set or reset. Syntax: <function name="ncfunc.bitset" refvar="address" value="set/reset" > bit0, bit1, … bit9 </function> Attributes: refvar - specifies the name of the variable, in which the bit combination should be written...
  • Page 855 Generating user dialogs 1.9 Predefined functions Function name Description Add Item The function inserts a new element at the end of the list. Note: The function is only available for the control types "listbox" and "graph‐ icbox". Syntax: <function name="control.additem"> control name, item </function>...
  • Page 856 Generating user dialogs 1.9 Predefined functions Function name Description Insert Item The function inserts a new element at the specified position. Note: The function is only available for the control types "listbox" and "graph‐ icbox". Syntax: <function name="control.insertitem"> control name, index, item, itemdata </function>...
  • Page 857 Generating user dialogs 1.9 Predefined functions Function name Description Load Item The function inserts a list of expressions into the control. The function is only available for the control types "listbox" and "graph‐ icbox". Syntax: <function name="control.loaditem"> control name, list </function> Attribute: name –...
  • Page 858 Generating user dialogs 1.9 Predefined functions Function name Description Empty The function deletes the contents of the specified list box or graphic box controls. Syntax: <function name="control.empty"> control name, </ function> Attribute: name – function name Values: control name – control name Example: <function name="...
  • Page 859 Generating user dialogs 1.9 Predefined functions Function name Description Set focus The function sets the input focus to the specified control. The Controlname should be transferred as text expression of the func‐ tion. Syntax: <function name="control.setfocus"> control name </ function> Attribute: name –...
  • Page 860 Generating user dialogs 1.9 Predefined functions Function name Description Get Item For a list box, the function copies the contents of the selected line to the specified variable. A string variable should be specified as reference variable. The Controlname should be transferred as text expression of the func‐ tion.
  • Page 861 Generating user dialogs 1.9 Predefined functions Function name Description Image Box Set This function is used to control the visible area of the image box control. The call parameters to be specified are the control name, the control command, and the associated values. Syntax: <function name="control.imageboxset">control name, command, command parameter</function>...
  • Page 862 Generating user dialogs 1.9 Predefined functions Function name Description Image Box Get This function is for querying the control properties image box The call parameters to be specified are the control command and the associ‐ ated values. Syntax: <function name="control.imageboxget">control name, command, command parameter</function>...
  • Page 863 Generating user dialogs 1.9 Predefined functions Function name Description Get Caption Height The function returns the title bar height in pixels. Syntax: <function name="hmi.get_caption_heigt" return="<return var>" /> Attributes: return - integer variable This function returns the absolute value of the specified number. Syntax: <function name="abs"...
  • Page 864 Generating user dialogs 1.9 Predefined functions Function name Description The function calculates the logarithm of the specified value. Syntax: <function name="log" return="var"> value </ function> LOG10 The function calculates the common (decadic) logarithm of the speci‐ fied value. Syntax: <function name="log10" return="var"> value </ function>...
  • Page 865 Generating user dialogs 1.9 Predefined functions Function name Description Function: You can use the MMC command to display user-defined dialog boxes (dialog screens) from the part program in SINUMERIK Operate. The appearance of the dialog boxes is defined in a pure text configuration (XML file in the manufacturer’s folder).
  • Page 866 Generating user dialogs 1.9 Predefined functions Function name Description MMC continued Example of synchronous call: Due to changes in the operate base system, the parameters are as follows: XML → CYCLES or POPUPDLG XML_ON → PICTURE_ON XML_OFF → PICTURE_OFF NC instruction MMC("EASYXML oder CYCLES”, XML_ON, mmc_cmd.xml, cmd1,,,,,","S") File: mmc_cmd.xml...
  • Page 867 Generating user dialogs 1.9 Predefined functions Function name Description MMC continued Example of extraction of script parts from a part program: Due to changes in the operate base system, the parameters are as follows: XML → CYCLES or POPUPDLG XML_ON → PICTURE_ON XML_OFF →...
  • Page 868 Generating user dialogs 1.9 Predefined functions Function name Description MMC continued Programming example ;<main_dialog entry="rpara_main"> ; <let name="xpos" /> ; <let name="ypos" /> ; <let name="field_name" type="string" /> ; <let name="num" /> ; <menu name="rpara_main"> ; <open_form name="rpara_form"/> ; <softkey_back> ;...
  • Page 869 Generating user dialogs 1.9 Predefined functions Function name Description ; <text xpos = "$xpos" ypos = "$ypos" >$$ $field_name</text> ; <op> ; ypos = ypos +24; ; count = count +1; ; </op> ; </while> ; </paint> ;</form> ;</main_dialog> … G94 F100 MMC(“XML,XML_ON,XMLDIAL_EMB.XML, main","A") …...
  • Page 870 Generating user dialogs 1.9 Predefined functions Function name Description String find The function searches the transferred string for the first match with the substring. If the substring is found, the function returns the index to the first char‐ acter (starting with zero) or, if not, -1. Parameter: string - string variable findstring - string to be found...
  • Page 871 Generating user dialogs 1.9 Predefined functions Function name Description String reverse find The function searches the transferred string for the last match with the substring. If the substring is found, the function returns the index to the first char‐ acter (starting with zero) or, if not, -1. Parameter: string - string variable find string - string to be found...
  • Page 872 Generating user dialogs 1.9 Predefined functions Easy XML Programming Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 873: Generating Commissioning Dialogs

    Generating commissioning dialogs Overview of functions Purpose The "Easy Extend" function provides a simple way of commissioning, activating, deactivating, or testing optional equipment. The available equipment and device states are displayed in a list by the control system. The system can manage a maximum of 64 devices. Softkeys are used to activate or deactivate a device.
  • Page 874 Generating commissioning dialogs 2.1 Overview of functions Configuration Figure 2-2 How "Easy Extend" works To use the "Easy Extend" function, the following functions must be configured by the machine manufacturer: ● PLC ↔ HMI interface The optional devices are managed via the interface between the user interface and the PLC.

  • Page 875: Configuration In The Plc User Program

    Generating commissioning dialogs 2.2 Configuration in the PLC user program Configuration in the PLC user program Loading configurations The configurations created are transferred to the manufacturer directory of the control, with the script and text file. Additionally, the corresponding PLC user program should be loaded. Programming the equipment Communication between the operator component and the PLC takes place in the PLC user program via data block DB9905, in which 128 words are reserved for the management of the...
  • Page 876 Generating commissioning dialogs 2.2 Configuration in the PLC user program General sequence The machine manufacturer must execute the following steps to make the required data available: 1. Creating a PLC user program which activates the device during activation on the PLC. 2.
  • Page 877 Generating commissioning dialogs 2.2 Configuration in the PLC user program Data format/symbolic identifier Meaning DBX2.1 Error_1 BOOL Bit OFF OFF PLC → HMI Device has an error DBB3 DeviceId_1 BYTE Unsigned 0 0 Unique device number Easy XML Programming Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 878: Display On The User Interface

    Generating commissioning dialogs 2.3 Display on the user interface Display on the user interface Dialogs on the user interface The following dialogs are available for the "Easy Extend" function: ● The control offers a configurable dialog, in which the available devices are shown. ●...

  • Page 879: Creating Language-Dependent Texts

    Generating commissioning dialogs 2.4 Creating language-dependent texts Creating language-dependent texts Structure of text file The XML files with the language-dependent texts must be created in UTF8 format: Example oem_aggregate_eng.ts <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" ?> <!DOCTYPE TS> <TS> <context> <name>EASY_EXTEND</name> <message> <source>DEVICE_ONE</source> <translation>Device one</translation>...

  • Page 880: User Example For A Power Unit

    Generating commissioning dialogs 2.5 User example for a power unit User example for a power unit Activating the drive object The drive object to be activated has already been commissioned and deactivated again by the machine manufacturer, to market the axis (axes) as an option. To activate the axis carry out the following steps: ●...

  • Page 881: Script Language

    Generating commissioning dialogs 2.6 Script language Activating the PLC-controlled device The device is addressed via output byte 10 and signals data set ready to the PLC via input byte 9. The output byte is set to the specified coding for activation. The WHILE loop then waits for the data set ready of the device.
  • Page 882 Generating commissioning dialogs 2.6 Script language Description Identifier <tag> Meaning Identifier for the "Startup Wizard" DEVICE Identifier for the description of the device. Attributes: ● option_bit The device is assigned a fixed bit number for the option management. NAME The identifier specifies the name of the device to be displayed in the dialog.
  • Page 883 Generating commissioning dialogs 2.6 Script language Example <?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> <!DOCTYPE AGM> <AGM> Identifier for the "Startup Wizard" <DEVICE> <NAME> Device 1 </NAME> Identifier for the device <START_UP> Identifier for commissioning the device … </START_UP> <SET_ACTIVE> Identifier for activating the device …...

  • Page 884: Control_Reset

    Generating commissioning dialogs 2.6 Script language 2.6.1 CONTROL_RESET Description This identifier allows one or more control components to be restarted. Execution of the script is only continued when the control has resumed cyclic operation. Programming Identifier: CONTROL_RESET Syntax: <CONTROL_RESET resetnc="TRUE" /> Attributes: resetnc="true"...

  • Page 885: Option_Md

    Generating commissioning dialogs 2.6 Script language create A commissioning archive is created under the specified name in the …/dvm/archives/ directory. group Specifies the data groups that are to be contained in the archive. If several data groups are to be saved, the groups should be separated by a blank.

  • Page 886: Plc_Interface

    Generating commissioning dialogs 2.6 Script language Programming Identifier: OPTION_MD Syntax: Area 0: <option_md name = "Address identifier of the data" /> <option_md name = "Address identifier of the data" index= "0"/> Area 1 to 3: <option_md name = "Address identifier of the data" index= "Area index"/> Attributes: name Identifier for the address, e.g.

  • Page 887: Power_Off

    Generating commissioning dialogs 2.6 Script language 2.6.5 POWER_OFF Description Identifier for a message prompting the operator to switch the machine off. The message text is permanently saved in the system. Programming Identifier: POWER_OFF Syntax: <power_off /> Attributes: 2.6.6 WAITING Description After a reset of the NC or the drive, there is a wait for the restart of the respective component.
  • Page 888 Generating commissioning dialogs 2.6 Script language Example <?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> <!DOCTYPE AGM> <AGM> <DEVICE> <NAME> Device 1 </NAME> <START_UP> … </START_UP> <SET_ACTIVE> … </SET_ACTIVE> … <FORM> Identifier for a user dialog <INIT> <CONTROL name = "edit1" .../> Identifier for an input field </INIT>...
  • Page 889 Generating commissioning dialogs 2.6 Script language Programming Identifier: SOFTKEY_OK Syntax: <SOFTKEY_OK> … </SOFTKEY_OK> Identifier: SOFTKEY_CANCEL Syntax: <SOFTKEY_CANCEL> … </SOFTKEY_CANCEL> Easy XML Programming Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 890 Generating commissioning dialogs 2.6 Script language Easy XML Programming Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 891 Index Extracting script parts, 100 Find substring, 93 Find substring (reverse), 94 FLOOR, 111 Configuration file, 7 Get cursor selection, 107 getfocus, 106 GetItem, 108 GetItemData, 108 Easy Extend, 121 ImageBoxGet, 110 ImageBoxSet, 58, 109 InsertItem, 104 Load user DLL, 97 LoadItem, 105 Generating commissioning dialogs, 121 LOG, 112...
  • Page 892 Index Tangent, 96 PLC_INTERFACE, 134 Title bar height, 111 POWER_OFF, 30, 135 Writing to a file, 99 PRINT, 31 XML identifier PROGRESS_BAR, 32 AGM, 130 PROPERTY, 61 AUTOSCALE_CONTENT, 22 REQUEST, 70 BOX, 67 RESIZE, 51 BREAK, 16 SEND_MESSAGE, 33, 50 CAPTION, 53 SET_ACTIVE, 130 CLOSE, 53...
  • Page 893 Introduction Setting up OPC UA components Testing the connection SINUMERIK OPC UA Data Access - functional scope SINUMERIK 840D sl/828D SINUMERIK Integrate for Engineering Access MyMachine / OPC UA Commissioning Manual Valid for: CNC software version 4.7 SP2 10/2015 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 894 Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems.
  • Page 895 Table of contents Introduction..............................5 Setting up OPC UA components........................7 Requirement..........................7 Setup............................8 Testing the connection..........................13 OPC UA Data Access - functional scope....................21 User administration........................22 Browsing..........................26 Variable paths........................28 4.3.1 Variable paths for NC access operations................28 4.3.2 Variable paths for GUD access operations................29 4.3.3 Variable paths for PLC access operations................29 4.3.4...
  • Page 896 Table of contents SINUMERIK Integrate for Engineering Access MyMachine / OPC UA Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 897: Introduction

    Introduction OPC Unified Architecture (OPC UA) is a standard communication protocol for the industrial environment. Software option You require the following software option in order to use this function: SINUMERIK Integrate for Engineering "Access MyMachine / OPC UA". Characteristics Important features include: ●...
  • Page 898 Introduction SINUMERIK Integrate for Engineering Access MyMachine / OPC UA Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 899: Setting Up Opc Ua Components

    Setting up OPC UA components Requirement The OPC UA components can be installed on PCU, NCU and PPU target systems. The following steps are necessary to do this: 1. Setting the license 2. Executing the OPC UA configuration dialog 3. Checking the HMI time 4.

  • Page 900: Setup

    Setting up OPC UA components 2.2 Setup Setup Setting the license Set the "Access MyMachine / OPC UA" license via the "Startup > Licenses" operating area. Figure 2-1 Setting the license Restart the SINUMERIK Operate in order to activate the license. SINUMERIK Integrate for Engineering Access MyMachine / OPC UA Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 901 Setting up OPC UA components 2.2 Setup Executing the OPC UA configuration dialog Start the OPC UA configuration dialog via the operating area "Startup > Network". Figure 2-2 OPC UA configuration dialog (initial state) Press the "Change" button. Table 2-1 Settings of the OPC UA configuration dialog Setting Description...
  • Page 902 Setting up OPC UA components 2.2 Setup Note If you want to change the administrator password later, you can do this via the OPC UA method "ChangeMyPassword". Figure 2-3 OPC UA configuration dialog (with corresponding changes) Then choose "OK". If you enter a different port from the standard OPC UA TCP port (4840), you will receive a safety note.
  • Page 903 You must correctly set the HMI time so that the secure OPC UA communication functions. Note The certificate needed for secure OPC UA communication (../siemens/sinumerik/hmi/miniweb/ System/Cert/servercerts/MiniWeb_OPCUA.crt) is automatically created during the first run-up. The start date of the validity period is set to the current date. The validity period is 30 years.
  • Page 904 Setting up OPC UA components 2.2 Setup SINUMERIK Integrate for Engineering Access MyMachine / OPC UA Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 905: Testing The Connection

    Testing the connection Requirement To test the connection, you can use the "Sample Applications" of the OPC Foundation (http:// www.opcf.org/) under "Developer Tools/Developer Kits/Unified Architecture". It is necessary to register with the OPC Foundation for this. Note There are two ways to establish the connection: ●...
  • Page 906 Testing the connection Figure 3-1 Deactivating the "OPC UA Local Discovery Server" service on PCU 50 SINUMERIK Integrate for Engineering Access MyMachine / OPC UA Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 907 Testing the connection Procedure 1. Start the OPC UA "Sample client". Figure 3-2 Sample Client main window 2. Select the "New" entry from the drop-down list. The "Discover Servers" window opens. SINUMERIK Integrate for Engineering Access MyMachine / OPC UA Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 908 Testing the connection 3. Now enter the IPv4 address of the target system and click the "Discover" button. Figure 3-3 Discover servers 4. The SINUMERIK OPC UA server appears in the list. Select the server and confirm with "OK". 5. Return to the main window and click the "Connect" button. SINUMERIK Integrate for Engineering Access MyMachine / OPC UA Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 909 Testing the connection 6. To establish a simple connection without security, make the following settings. Enter the administrator user assigned when OPC UA was set up and his password by pressing "..." for "User Identity". Then confirm the settings with "OK". Figure 3-4 Server configuration Figure 3-5...
  • Page 910 Testing the connection 7. Make the following settings in the "Open Session" dialog. It is necessary to enter the administrator user and the assigned password again here. Confirm with "OK". Figure 3-6 Open session Confirm the prompt asking if you want to trust the transferred certificate with "Yes". The connection to the SINUMERIK OPC UA server has now been established and the available address space is displayed.
  • Page 911 Testing the connection – E.g. read, write, setup monitoring Figure 3-8 NodeID "Sinumerik > Channel > Parameter > R" – The attributes of a NodeID can be queried via the entry "View Attributes". One of these attributes is the "Value", which provides the corresponding value of R1. Figure 3-9 Viewing node attributes SINUMERIK Integrate for Engineering Access MyMachine / OPC UA...
  • Page 912 Testing the connection SINUMERIK Integrate for Engineering Access MyMachine / OPC UA Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 913: Opc Ua Data Access - Functional Scope

    The number of variables from the "Sinumerik" object that can be monitored simultaneously is limited: ● SINUMERIK 828D, maximum 100 variables ● SINUMERIK 840D sl, maximum 200 variables If you attempt to monitor more variables, the "BadNodeIdUnknown" error is returned.

  • Page 914: User Administration

    OPC UA Data Access - functional scope 4.1 User administration User administration User administration To establish a connection to the OPC UA Data Access interface, an authentication with user name and password is required. Note Anonymous connection You can also establish an anonymous connection, but none of the functions will be available (feedback: "BadInternalError").
  • Page 915 OPC UA Data Access - functional scope 4.1 User administration Method Description ChangeMyPassword Changes the password for the connected user. Input Arguments: OldPwd Current password NewPwd1 New password NewPwd2 New password (security prompt) Important! Whereas the methods "AddUser", "DeleteUser", "GiveUserAccess" and "De‐ leteUserAccess"...
  • Page 916 OPC UA Data Access - functional scope 4.1 User administration Method Description GiveUserAccess Sets the specified access rights for a user. The rights below can be combined in any combination. Input Arguments: User User name which is to given the rights Realm The access rights to be set as a string.
  • Page 917 OPC UA Data Access - functional scope 4.1 User administration Method Description DeleteUserAccess Deletes the specified access rights for a user. Input Arguments: User A user whose rights are to be deleted Realm The access rights to be deleted as a string.

  • Page 918: Browsing

    OPC UA Data Access - functional scope 4.2 Browsing Browsing If the OPC UA data access interface is browsed, then the available address space is mapped under "Sinumerik". Global User Data (GUD) can be found under the "/Sinumerik/GUD" node. The PLC blocks (inputs, outputs, bit memory, data blocks) can be found under the "/Sinumerik/ Plc"...
  • Page 919 OPC UA Data Access - functional scope 4.2 Browsing Figure 4-1 Excerpt from browsing the OPC UA data access interface SINUMERIK Integrate for Engineering Access MyMachine / OPC UA Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 920: Variable Paths

    OPC UA Data Access - functional scope 4.3 Variable paths Variable paths 4.3.1 Variable paths for NC access operations The variable paths for NC access are stored in the address space of the SINUMERIK Operate OPC UA server. Pay attention to the correct upper-case and lower-case of the "nodeID". The respective identifier of the "nodeID"...

  • Page 921: Variable Paths For Gud Access Operations

    OPC UA Data Access - functional scope 4.3 Variable paths 4.3.2 Variable paths for GUD access operations The variable paths for NC access are stored in the address space of the SINUMERIK Operate OPC UA server under the "/Sinumerik/GUD" node. Pay attention to the correct upper-case and lower-case of the "nodeID".
  • Page 922 OPC UA Data Access - functional scope 4.3 Variable paths In the address space of the NC, the displayed variables represent the access format that has to be extended accordingly. Example The variable "/Plc/MB" is in the address space. This variable must be extended by the appropriate byte number, e.g.
  • Page 923 OPC UA Data Access - functional scope 4.3 Variable paths Area Address (IEC) Permissible data types OPC UA data type Bit memory WORD, CHAR, UInt32 Int32 Bit memory DWORD, UInt32 DINT, Int32 REAL Double Counters Byte timers UInt32 Notes regarding the table: ●...

  • Page 924: Variable Paths For Machine And Setting Data

    OPC UA Data Access - functional scope 4.3 Variable paths Note the following: Note ● Timers can only be read. A timer is active if it contains a value other than 0. ● If the data type CHAR or STRING is used in conjunction with a byte access, UTF8 characters are read, but if either data type is used in conjunction with a word access, UTF16 characters are read.
  • Page 925 OPC UA Data Access - functional scope 4.3 Variable paths Examples of variable paths (1:N constellation) Table 4-6 Examples of variable paths (1:N constellation) Variable path Description /Random@NCU_1/Channel/Parameter/R[u1,10] R parameter 10 in channel 1 of NCU_1 /Random@NCU_2/Channel/Parameter/R[u1,10] R parameter 10 in channel 1 of NCU_2 /Random@NCU_1/Plc/DB123.DBB0 Byte at byte offset 0 in data...

  • Page 926: Supported Services

    OPC UA Data Access - functional scope 4.4 Supported services Supported services The following services of the OPC UA data access specification are supported: ● ActivateSessionService ● AddNodesService ● AddReferencesService ● BrowseNextService ● BrowseService ● CallService ● CloseSessionService ● CreateMonitoredItemsService ●...

  • Page 927: Special Features With Regard To The Opc Ua Specification

    OPC UA Data Access - functional scope 4.5 Special features with regard to the OPC UA specification Special features with regard to the OPC UA specification TranslateBrowsePathsToNodeIdsService If a non-existing NodeId is specified in TranslateBrowsePathsToNodeIds, then "BadNoMatch" is returned instead of "BadNodeIdUnknown". Maximum number of parallel sessions Five parallel sessions are supported.
  • Page 928 OPC UA Data Access - functional scope 4.5 Special features with regard to the OPC UA specification SINUMERIK Integrate for Engineering Access MyMachine / OPC UA Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 929 Index Variables monitoring, 21 read, 21 write, 21 AddUser, 22 Architecture, 5 Binary protocol, 5 Browsing, 26 ChangeMyPassword, 23 Characteristics, 5 Checking the time, 11 Configuration dialog, 9 Data types, 30 DeleteUser, 22 DeleteUserAccess, 25 GiveUserAccess, 24 License, 8 Logs, 5 OPC UA data access interface Functional scope, 21 OPC UA Local Discovery Server, 13...
  • Page 930 Index SINUMERIK Integrate for Engineering Access MyMachine / OPC UA Commissioning Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 931 Introduction Getting Started Fundamentals SINUMERIK Dialogs SINUMERIK 840D sl/828D SINUMERIK Integrate Run Variables MyScreens Programming commands Programming Manual Graphic and logic elements "Custom" operating area Dialog selection Reference lists Tips and tricks Animated elements Glossary Valid for: CNC software V4.7 SP2 10/2015 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 932 Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems.
  • Page 933 Table of contents Introduction..............................9 Getting Started............................13 Introduction..........................13 Example..........................13 2.2.1 Task description........................13 2.2.2 Creating the configuration file....................17 2.2.3 Saving the configuration file in the OEM directory..............20 2.2.4 Creating the online help......................21 2.2.5 Saving the online help in the OEM directory................23 2.2.6 Copying easyscreen.ini into the OEM directory..............23 2.2.7 Registering the COM file in easyscreen.ini................24...
  • Page 934 Table of contents Example 1: Assigning the variable type, texts, help display, colors, tooltips......63 Example 2: Assigning the Variable Type, Limits, Attributes, Short Text Position properties..........................64 Example 3: Assigning the Variable Type, Default, System or User Variable, Input/Output Field Position properties......................65 Example 4: Toggle field and list field..................65 Example 5: Image display......................66 Example 6: Progress bar......................66...
  • Page 935 Table of contents 6.2.7 LOAD...........................100 6.2.8 UNLOAD..........................101 6.2.9 OUTPUT..........................102 6.2.10 PRESS..........................103 6.2.11 PRESS(ENTER)........................104 6.2.12 PRESS(TOGGLE)........................104 6.2.13 RESOLUTION........................105 6.2.14 RESUME..........................105 6.2.15 SUSPEND..........................106 6.2.16 Example: Version management with OUTPUT methods.............106 Functions..........................108 6.3.1 Reading and writing drive parameters: RDOP, WDOP, MRDOP........108 6.3.2 Subprogram call (CALL).......................110 6.3.3 Define block (//B)........................111 6.3.4...
  • Page 936 Table of contents Defining an array........................165 7.2.1 Accessing the value of an array element................166 7.2.2 Example Access to an array element...................168 7.2.3 Scanning the status of an array element................170 Table description (grid)......................170 7.3.1 Defining a table (grid)......................172 7.3.2 Defining columns........................172 7.3.3 Focus control in the table (cell)....................174 Custom widgets........................175...
  • Page 937 Table of contents Animated elements...........................211 Introduction..........................211 Modeling..........................212 C.2.1 Requirements........................212 C.2.2 Rules for modeling.......................212 C.2.3 Importing graphics (models)....................215 C.2.4 Modeling templates......................217 XML commands........................218 C.3.1 Overview..........................218 C.3.2 Structure of the scene description file..................219 C.3.3 Mirroring and rotations......................222 C.3.4 View type..........................222 Conversion to hmi file......................223 Display in Create MyHMI /3GL.....................223 C.5.1 X3D Viewer..........................223...
  • Page 938 Table of contents SINUMERIK Integrate Run MyScreens Programming Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 939: Introduction

    Software option To expand the number of dialogs, you require one of the following software options: ● SINUMERIK 828D/840D sl, SINUMERIK Integrate Run MyScreens (6FC5800-0AP64-0YB0) ● SINUMERIK 840D sl, SINUMERIK Integrate Run MyScreens + Run MyHMI (6FC5800-0AP65-0YB0) ●...
  • Page 940 Make sure that the coding is set to UTF-8 in the editor that you are using when saving the configuration and language files. Storage paths Note the following convention when storing the configuration files, language files, etc. [System Siemens directory] Linux: /card/siemens/sinumerik/hmi Windows 7: C:\ProgramData\Siemens\MotionControl\siemens [System oem directory]...
  • Page 941 Introduction [System oem directory] /Ico/ico [Resolution] Image files: Example: [System oem directory] /Ico/ico640 Online Help: [System oem directory] /hlp/ [Language] Example: [System oem directory] /hlp/eng Application You can implement the following functions: Display dialogs containing the fol‐ ● Softkeys lowing elements: ●...
  • Page 942 Introduction SINUMERIK Integrate Run MyScreens Programming Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 943: Getting Started

    Getting Started Introduction Using the following example, you get to know the steps necessary to insert your own dialogs into the SINUMERIK Operate user interface using Run MySreens. You also learn how to create your own dialogs, insert context-sensitive help screens and help calls, define softkeys and how you can navigate between the dialogs.
  • Page 944 Getting Started 2.2 Example Figure 2-2 Geometry axes with context sensitive help Figure 2-3 Toggle fields: List and box SINUMERIK Integrate Run MyScreens Programming Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 945 Getting Started 2.2 Example Figure 2-4 I/O field with integrated unit selection Dialog 2 MCS and WCS values are displayed in the second dialog. The dialog also contains examples of progress bars with and without color change. Figure 2-5 Progress bars with (right) and without (left) color change SINUMERIK Integrate Run MyScreens Programming Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 946 Getting Started 2.2 Example Navigation The first dialog is called using the "START" softkey in the diagnostics operating area. The horizontal SK7 softkey is used. Figure 2-6 Start softkey „START“ in the machine operating area, AUTO mode You can call the second dialog from the first dialog with the "Next Mask" softkey. You can return to the root screen of the operating area by pressing the "EXIT"...

  • Page 947: Creating The Configuration File

    Getting Started 2.2 Example 2.2.2 Creating the configuration file Content of the configuration file Using a UTF8-capable editor, create the configuration file diag.com for the two dialogs. ; Start identifier of start softkey //S(START) ; Start softkey only text HS7=("START") ;...
  • Page 948 Getting Started 2.2 Example ; Softkey definition in the dialog HS1=("") HS2=("") HS3=("") HS4=("") HS5=("") HS6=("") HS7=("") HS8=("") VS1=("") VS2=("") VS3=("") VS4=("") VS5=("") VS6=("") VS7=("Next Mask") VS8=("EXIT") ; Definition LOAD block LOAD ; Read value with RNP ACHS_NAM1 = RNP("$MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB[0]") ACHS_NAM2 = RNP("$MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB[1]") ACHS_NAM3 = RNP("$MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB[2]") ;...
  • Page 949 Getting Started 2.2 Example ; Exit the dialog EXIT ; End identifier press method END_PRESS ; End identifier dialog 1 //END ; Definition of dialog 2 with header and screen //M(MASK2/"Position WCS MCS"/"mz961_01.png") ; Definition of the variables DEF TEXT1 = (I///,"WCS"/WR0,fs2///230,30,120/,,1) DEF VAR1 = (R3///,"1.

  • Page 950: Saving The Configuration File In The Oem Directory

    Getting Started 2.2 Example ; Load method LOAD H_SEPARATOR(230,1,7,1) END_LOAD ; Change method CHANGE(VAR5) ; Function PI_START PI_START("/NC,201,_N_SETUFR") ; End identifier change method END_CHANGE ; Press method PRESS(RECALL) ; Return to the calling mask LM("MASK1") ; End identifier press method END_PRESS ;...

  • Page 951: Creating The Online Help

    Getting Started 2.2 Example 2.2.4 Creating the online help Content of the online help Create the HTML file sinumerik_md_1.html. The section below shows the context-sensitive help call via name="20060[0]" and name="20060[1]". The help file is not commented, as this manual does not discuss creating online help. Notes regarding the integration of online help are provided in Section Configuring the online help (Page 58).
  • Page 952 Getting Started 2.2 Example <html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset="UTF-8"/><title></ title></head> <body> <table border="1" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2" width="100%"> <tr> <td><a name="20060[0]"><b>20060[0]</b></a></td> <td colspan="3">AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB</td> <center> <img src="../picture/bitmap3.png"> </center> <td>-</td> <td>-</td> </tr> <tr> <td>-</td> <td colspan="3">Geometry axis name in channel</td> <td>DWORD</td> <td>POWER ON</td> </tr> <tr> <td colspan="6">This MD is used to enter the names of the geometry axes separately for each channel.<br />...

  • Page 953: Saving The Online Help In The Oem Directory

    A list of language codes is provided in the Appendix. 2.2.6 Copying easyscreen.ini into the OEM directory Storage path Copy the file easyscreen.ini from the directory [System SIEMENS directory] /cfg to the directory [System oem directory] /cfg SINUMERIK Integrate Run MyScreens Programming Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 954: Registering The Com File In Easyscreen.ini

    Getting Started 2.2 Example 2.2.7 Registering the COM file in easyscreen.ini Adaptation in easyscreen.ini Make the following change in the easyscreen.ini in the OEM directory. You have thus registered the diag.com configuration file. ;######################## ;# AREA Diagnosis ;######################## ;<===============================================================> ;< OEM Softkey on first horizontal Main Menu >...

  • Page 955: Fundamentals

    Fundamentals Structure of configuration file Introduction The description of new user interfaces is stored in configuration files. These files are automatically interpreted and the result displayed on the screen. Configuration files are not stored in the software supplied and must be set up by the user. A UTF-8-capable editor (e.g.
  • Page 956 Fundamentals 3.1 Structure of configuration file Note Sequence The specified sequence in the configuration file must be maintained. Example: //S (START) ; Definition of the start softkey (optional) ..//END //M (..) ; Definition of the dialog DEF ..; Definition of the variables LOAD ;...

  • Page 957: Structure Of The Menu Tree

    Fundamentals 3.2 Structure of the menu tree Structure of the menu tree Menu tree principle Several interlinked dialogs create a menu tree. A link exists if you can switch from one dialog to another. You can use the newly defined horizontal/vertical softkeys in this dialog to call the preceding or any other dialog.

  • Page 958: Definition And Functions For Start Softkeys

    Fundamentals 3.3 Definition and functions for start softkeys You can use the <RECALL> key to close new user interfaces if you have not configured this key for any other task. Note Calling dialogs in the PLC user program Dialogs can be selected from the PLC as well as via softkeys: An interface signal is available in DB19.DBB10 for signal exchange between the PLC →...

  • Page 959: Functions For Start Softkeys

    A detailed description of all permissible positions for start softkeys and their configuration is located in the easyscreen.ini file in the following directory: [System SIEMENS directory] /cfg This file is used as a template for your own configuration of the start softkey.
  • Page 960 ● [System add_on directory]/ proj ● [System Siemens directory] /proj ● The configurations included for the start softkeys are now merged to form a configuration, i.e. the individual softkeys are compared. If there are two or more configurations for a softkey, the higher order configuration is always transferred into the merge version.

  • Page 961: Troubleshooting (Log Book)

    Fundamentals 3.4 Troubleshooting (log book) Softkey menus or dialogs that are possibly included are ignored. If a softkey has a command without file information, e.g. LM ("test"), as the required softkey menu or dialog is contained in the same file, then the corresponding file name is supplemented in the internal merge version so that in this case, no changes are required.

  • Page 962: Notes On The Easyscreen.ini

    VAR1 = VAR2 + 1 ; Notes on the easyscreen.ini As of SINUMERIK Operate V4.7, the easyscreen.ini has been extended by the entries [System Siemens directory] / described in this section. The easyscreen.ini can be found in the cfg directory.
  • Page 963 Fundamentals 3.5 Notes on the easyscreen.ini DefaultLineSpacing=3 Notes: ● The "SymmetricalAspectRatio" entry determines whether the same aspect ratio is used in the X and Y direction when adapting a configuration to a specific screen resolution. – "false" (default): Fields and graphics are shortened in widescreen resolution in the Y direction (asymmetrical elongation in relation to 640x480).

  • Page 964: Notes For Personnel Changing Over To "Run Myscreens

    Fundamentals 3.6 Notes for personnel changing over to "Run MyScreens" The screen position can be defined as follows: ● The screen position can be specified in "Pixels in relation to 640x480". Example: //M(MyMask/"MyCaption"/"\\myhelp.png"/0,219,335,174) ● The screen position can be coupled to the resolution-dependent position of a form panel from an Operate standard screen layout, e.g.
  • Page 965 Check whether the number of dialogs that you have entered exceeds the basic scope of a maximum of five dialogs. To expand the number of dialogs, you require one of the following software options: ● SINUMERIK 828D/840D sl, SINUMERIK Integrate Run MyScreens (6FC5800-0AP64-0YB0) ● SINUMERIK 840D sl, SINUMERIK Integrate Run MyScreens + Run MyHMI (6FC5800-0AP65-0YB0) ●...

  • Page 966: Extended Configuration Syntax

    Fundamentals 3.7 Extended configuration syntax Extended configuration syntax As of SINUMERIK Operate V4.7, a simplified syntax is available for the definition of screens, variables, softkeys and for table columns. Reading and servicing are improved with this alternative syntax. The properties and attributes can be specified in any order, empty entries are omitted.
  • Page 967 Fundamentals 3.7 Extended configuration syntax DEF MyVar6={TYP="R2", TGL="+$80000", VAR="$R[10]", ST="Text offset"} Extended syntax for the definition of softkeys SK = {[ST=<Label>] [,AC=<Access level>] [,SE=<Status>]} Examples: HS1={ST="""MySk""", AC=6, SE=1} HS3={ST="SOFTKEY_CANCEL"} HS5={ST="[$81251,""\\sk_ok.png""]"} HS8={ST="[""Test"",""\\sk_ok.png""]"} Extended syntax for the definition of table columns {[TYP=<Type>] [,MIN=<Minimum value>] [,MAX=<Maximum value>] [,LT=<Long text>] [,ST=<Short text>] [,WR=<Input mode>] [,AC=<Access level>] [,AL=<Text alignment>] [,FS=<Font size>] [,LI=<Limit value processing>] [,UR=<Update rate>] [,HLP=<Help display>] [,VAR=<System or user variable>] >] [,W=<Column width>] [,OF1=<Offset1>]...
  • Page 968 Fundamentals 3.7 Extended configuration syntax SINUMERIK Integrate Run MyScreens Programming Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 969: Dialogs

    Dialogs Structure and elements of a dialog 4.1.1 Defining a dialog Definition A dialog is part of a user interface consisting of a display line, dialog elements and/or graphics, an output line for messages and 8 horizontal and 8 vertical softkeys. Dialog elements are: ●...
  • Page 970 Dialogs 4.1 Structure and elements of a dialog ● Graphic position ● Attributes ① Machine status display ("header") ② Dialog element ③ 8 vertical softkeys ④ 8 horizontal softkeys ⑤ Output of diagnostic messages ⑥ Graphic ⑦ Dialog ⑧ Header line of the dialog with header and long text Figure 4-1 Structure of the dialog Overview...

  • Page 971: Defining Dialog Properties

    Dialogs 4.1 Structure and elements of a dialog Within the dialog definition block, various variables that appear as dialog elements in the dialog, as well as horizontal and vertical softkeys, are defined first. Different types of actions are then configured in methods. 4.1.2 Defining dialog properties Description...
  • Page 972 Dialogs 4.1 Structure and elements of a dialog Parameter: Identifier Name of the dialog. Header Dialog header as text or call for text (e.g. $85011) from a language-specific text file. Graphic Graphics file with path in double quotation marks. Dimension Position and size of the dialog in pixels (distance from left-hand side, dis‐...
  • Page 973 Dialogs 4.1 Structure and elements of a dialog Example: Set screen background color blue (= 6) //M(MyMask/"MyMask"//////6) PRESS(HS1) MC=6 END_PRESS Accessing the dialog properties Read and write access to the following dialog properties is permitted within methods (e.g. PRESS block). ●...
  • Page 974 Dialogs 4.1 Structure and elements of a dialog Example Figure 4-3 "Example 2: showing graphic" //S(Start) HS7=("Example", se1, ac7) PRESS(HS7) LM("Mask2") END_PRESS //END //M(Mask2/"Example 2 : showing graphic"/"example.png") HS1=("new%nHeader") HS2=("") HS3=("") HS4=("") HS5=("") HS6=("") HS7=("") HS8=("") VS1=("") VS2=("") VS3=("") SINUMERIK Integrate Run MyScreens Programming Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 975: Defining Dialog Elements

    Dialogs 4.1 Structure and elements of a dialog VS4=("") VS5=("") VS6=("") VS7=("") VS8=("") PRESS(HS1) Hd= "new Header" END_PRESS //END See also Programming example for the "Custom" area (Page 188) 4.1.3 Defining dialog elements Dialog element The term "dialog element" refers to the visible part of a variable, i.e. short text, graphics text, input/output field, unit text and tooltip.
  • Page 976 Dialogs 4.1 Structure and elements of a dialog Variable properties All variables are valid in the active dialog only. Properties are assigned to a variable when it is defined. The values of dialog properties can be accessed within methods (e.g. a PRESS method).

  • Page 977: Defining Dialogs With Multiple Columns

    Dialogs 4.1 Structure and elements of a dialog /[Colors] /[online help] (Page 58) See also Variable parameters (Page 69) 4.1.4 Defining dialogs with multiple columns Overview Multiple variables can also be represented in a dialog on one line. In this case, the variables are all defined in the configuration file on a single definition line.

  • Page 978: Password Dialogs

    Dialogs 4.1 Structure and elements of a dialog 4.1.5 Password dialogs Using the standard password dialogs You can integrate the following predefined password dialogs in the screen configuration: ● Set password Figure 4-5 Set password dialog ● Change password Figure 4-6 Change password dialog ●...
  • Page 979 Dialogs 4.1 Structure and elements of a dialog Figure 4-7 Delete password dialog Note The password functionality is already set with these dialogs. The dialogs do not correspond to the dialogs of SINUMERIK Operate. The dialogs can be called either via the Load softkey (LS) function or the Load mask (LM) function: 1.

  • Page 980: Using Display Images/Graphics

    Dialogs 4.2 Defining softkey menus 4.1.6 Using display images/graphics Use of graphics A distinction is made between: ● Display images / graphics in the graphic area. ● Help displays illustrating, for example, individual variables, which are superimposed in the graphic area. ●...
  • Page 981 Dialogs 4.2 Defining softkey menus The definition of a softkey menu (softkey menu definition block) is basically structured as follows: Definition block Comment Section reference ;Start identifier of softkey menu //S... ;Define softkeys HSx=... ;Method start identifier See Section "Methods" PRESS(HSx) ;Actions LM...
  • Page 982 Dialogs 4.2 Defining softkey menus Text Enter text Display file name "\\my_pic.png" or via separate text file $85199, e.g. with the following text in the (language-specific) text file: 85100 0 0 "\ \my_pic.png". The image size which can be displayed on a softkey depends on the OP used: OP 08: 640 x 480 mm →...

  • Page 983: Changing Softkey Properties During Runtime

    Dialogs 4.2 Defining softkey menus HS2=("\\image1.png") ; Assign a softkey to the graphic HS3=("Exit") HS4=(["Confirm","\\sk_ok.png"],PA0,TP1) ; Softkey with text and graphic, Text="Confirm", Im- age="sk_ok.png", Alignment of the softkey image: Left, text is aligned to the image VS1=("sub screen form") VS2=($85011, ac7, se2) ;...
  • Page 984 Dialogs 4.2 Defining softkey menus Programming Syntax: SK.st = "Text" ;Softkey with label SK.ac = Access level ;Softkey with protection level SK.se = Status ; Softkey with status SK.pa = "Alignment of the softkey image" ;Softkey with image SK.tp = "Text alignment in relation to the soft‐ ;Softkey with image and label key image"...
  • Page 985 Dialogs 4.2 Defining softkey menus Example Figure 4-8 Example 3: Graphics and softkeys //S(Start) HS7=("Example", ac7, se1) PRESS(HS7) LM("Maske3") END_PRESS //END //M(Maske3/"Example 2: showing graphic"/"example.png") HS1=("") HS2=("") HS3=("") HS4=("") HS5=("") HS6=("") HS7=("") HS8=("") SINUMERIK Integrate Run MyScreens Programming Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 986: Language-Dependent Text

    Dialogs 4.2 Defining softkey menus VS1=("") VS2=("") VS3=("") VS4=("\\sp_ok.png",,SE1) VS5=(["\\sp_ok_small.png","OEM Text"],,SE1) VS6=("") VS7=(SOFTKEY_OK,,SE1) VS8=(SOFTKEY_CANCEL,,SE1) PRESS(VS4) EXIT END_PRESS PRESS(VS5) EXIT END_PRESS PRESS(VS7) EXIT END_PRESS PRESS(VS8) EXIT END_PRESS //END 4.2.2 Language-dependent text Overview Language-dependent texts are used for: ● Softkey labels ● Headings ●...
  • Page 987 For example: [System user directory] /lng/[Text file] [System user directory] /proj/[Configuration file] alsc.txt Language-dependent texts for the Siemens standard cycles almc.txt Language-dependent texts for the Siemens measuring cycles The text files used during program runtime are specified in the easyscreen.ini file: [LANGUAGEFILES] LngFile03 = user.txt...

  • Page 988: Configuring The Online Help

    Dialogs 4.3 Configuring the online help Parameter: xxxx 85,000 to 89,999 Text identification number range reserved for users. You must assign unique numbers. "Text" Text that appears in the dialog Control characters in the text for creating a line break Parameters 2 and 3 are separated by blanks and act as control characters for alarm text output.
  • Page 989 Dialogs 4.3 Configuring the online help References Commissioning Manual "Base software and operating software" (IM9), Chapter "OEM-specific online help" SINUMERIK Integrate Run MyScreens Programming Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...
  • Page 990 Dialogs 4.3 Configuring the online help SINUMERIK Integrate Run MyScreens Programming Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-3DP40-5BA3...

  • Page 991: Variables

    Variables Defining variables Variable value The major property of a variable is its value. The value of variables can be assigned by means of: ● Default settings when defining variables ● Assignment to a system or user variable ● A method Programming Syntax: Identifier.val = Variable value...

  • Page 992: Application Examples

    Variables 5.2 Application examples Application examples Help variables Help variables are internal arithmetic variables. Arithmetic variables are defined like other variables, but have no other properties apart from variable value and status, i.e. Help variables are not visible in the dialog. Help variables are of the VARIANT type. Programming Identifier Syntax:...

  • Page 993: Example 1: Assigning The Variable Type, Texts, Help Display, Colors, Tooltips

    Variables 5.3 Example 1: Assigning the variable type, texts, help display, colors, tooltips Addressing system variables indirectly A system variable can also be addressed indirectly, i.e. as a function of another variable: PRESS(HS1) ACHSE=ACHSE+1 WEG.VAR="$AA_DTBW["<<ACHSE<<"]" ;Address axis address via variable END_PRESS Changing softkey labels Example:...

  • Page 994: Example 2: Assigning The Variable Type, Limits, Attributes, Short Text Position Properties

    Variables 5.4 Example 2: Assigning the Variable Type, Limits, Attributes, Short Text Position properties Example 1b The following example defines a variable for which the properties variable type, default setting, texts, tooltip, input mode and position of short text are set. DEF Var2 = (I//5/"","Value","","","...

  • Page 995: Example 3: Assigning The Variable Type, Default, System Or User Variable, Input/Output Field Position Properties

    Variables 5.6 Example 4: Toggle field and list field Example 3: Assigning the Variable Type, Default, System or User Variable, Input/Output Field Position properties Example 3 The following example defines a variable for which the properties variable type, default setting, system or user variable and position are set.

  • Page 996: Example 5: Image Display

    Variables 5.8 Example 6: Progress bar Example 4b The list field corresponds to the configuration of a toggle field, but the display type for the list field (variable attribute DT = 4) must also be set. DEF VAR_LISTBOX_Text = (S/*$80000,$80001,$80002,$80003,$80004/$80001//DT4////200,,340,60) Variable type: STRING Limits / toggle field:...
  • Page 997 Variables 5.8 Example 6: Progress bar Basically there are two progress bar types: 1. Progress bars with up to two color changes, e.g. for temperature or utilization display (see example 6a) 2. Progress bars to display the progress (without color change) in the Operate style (see example 6b) Example 6a Progress bar with two color changes:...
  • Page 998 Variables 5.8 Example 6: Progress bar Depending on the current value of the variable PROGGY0, this setting already displays a progress bar with the foreground color 3 (= dark green) and the background color 4 (= light gray). Optionally, one or two signal values SVAL1 and SVAL2 (limit parameters) can be defined (in the example SVAL1: 50 and SVAL2: 100).

  • Page 999: Example 7: Password Input Mode (Asterisk)

    Variables 5.10 Variable parameters Example 7: Password input mode (asterisk) Example 7 To implement a field with hidden input, e.g. for the input of a password, the display mode DT must be set to 5. Asterisks are then displayed instead of the entered characters. Figure 5-3 Password input mode (asterisk) DEF VAR_SET_PWD=(S//""//DT5)
  • Page 1000 Variables 5.10 Variable parameters Parameter Description Limits (Page 64) Limit value MIN, limit value MAX Default setting: Empty The limit values are separated by a comma. Limits can be specified for types I, C and R in decimal formats or as characters in the form "A", "F". Optionally, two signal colors SC1 and SC2 can be configured for the display of a progress bar with color change (variable attribute DT = 1) which are displayed as the respective foreground color of the bar when the signal value SVAL1 or SVAL2 is exceeded.

Table of Contents

Save PDF